B8tf jSeto goife £>tate College of Agriculture 3t Cornell tHnibersitp JllUaca, Jfl. &. SUbrarp THE “ ’Tis sweet to view the limpid waters dance, As o’or their pebbly bed they eager rush; Or in the sun’s effulgence brightly glance, As through the mead meandering they gush ; Now riuging forth rich music, now all hush, While song-birds chant the ever varied lay, From out tho willow aud o’erhanging bush : O, sweet it is to thread the blithsome way, Clad in an angling guise, to spend a happy day. “ O, ever health Ail is the mountain air, And ever pleasant is the verdant glade; ’Tis sweet to wander through the greenwood, where The sparkling current hath its passage made. , I love, at times, the cooling stream to wade, Where brushwood dense a way will not allow; I love the arening bowers, aud sylvan shade, And blossoms sweet that wave from many a bough, As cautiously udown the rippling path I go. “ How meagre seems the world of business 6trifo, Compared with pleasures which the unglcr knows; A scene of toil with disappointment rife, Aud scarce un hour of calm and sweet repose, This lovely world is made a world of woes, To him whose soul is wrapped in sottish gains; From manhood’s prime, till life at length may close, His feolings all are bound in Mammon’s chains, And wealth at most ho hoards for all bis pains . 11 I THE American Angler’s (ftuibe. BEING A COMPILATION FROM THE WORKS OF POPULAR ENGLISH AUTHORS, FROM WALTON TO THE PRESENT TIME; TOGETHER WITH THE OPINIONS AND PRACTICES OF THE BEST AMERICAN ANGLERS: CONTAINING EVERT VARIETY OF MODE ADOPTED IN OCEAN, RIVER, LAKE AND POND FISHING; THF NECESSARY TACKLE AND BAITS REQUIRED J MANNER OFMAKING ARTIFICIAL FLIES, icC. &C. AC. } OTitjj 3S«Qtabfnas on I®ooB. BY AN AMERICAN ANGLER. NEW-YORK: BURGESS, STRINGER & CO., AND FOR SALE BY JOHN J. BROWN & CO. At the Angler’s Depot, 122 Fulton-stroet. SS Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1845, by JOHN J. BROWN, in tho Clerk’s Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New-York. JOHN R. U’OOWN, PRINTER, 128, FULTON-STREET. CONTENTS PAGE. Preface 7 Introduction -.9 Introductory Remarks on Angling - 13 Chapter I — On the Materials used in Angling 20 Ch apter II — On Baits used in Angling - 34 Chapter III — Observations on the Practice of Angling 46 Chapter IV — The Salmon 52 Chapter V — Of the Salmon Trout, Lake Trout, or Lake Salmon 64 Chapter VI — Of the Trout 66 Chapter VII — Of the Pike, Jack, or Muscalinga - 115 Chapter VIII — Of the Perch 140 Sun-Fish - ' - - - - 149 Chapter IX — Of the Carp or Tench - 151 Chapter X — Of the Striped Basse, or Rock-Fish - 159 Chapter XI — Of the Weak-Fish, Wheat-Fish, or Sque- teague 170 Chapter XII — Of the King-Fish, or Barb - - 174 i Chapter XIII — Of the Black-Fish, or Tautog - - 178 Chapter XIV — Of the Drum 186 Chapter XV — Of the Black, or Oswego Basse - - 189 Chapter XVI — Of the Sheepshead .... 195 VI CONTENTS. PAGE. Chapter XVII— -Of the Cod and Tom-Cod - - 203 Chapter XVIII — Of the Flounder - 207 Chapter XIX — Of the Blue-Fish - - - - 210 Chapter XX — Of the Sea-Basse, Porgee, &c. - 214 Chapter XXI — Of some of the other Inhabitants of the Waters 217 The Eel - - - - - 217 The Chub 218 The Bull-Head, Sucker, Bream, Roach, Dace, Bleak, Gudgeon and Herring 21.9 The White-Fish and Cat-Fish - 220 Chapter XXII — Concluding Remarks - - - 221 ERRATA. The reader is requested to make the following corrections, which have occurred in printing: Page 58, line 14, lor “ substituting a swivel and small shot” read *' substituting a swivel.” Pago 75 line 13, for •« on a light shotted length of gut ” read “on a light length of gut.” Puge 205, liues 12 and 13, for “ from eight ounces to a pound,” road ” from one to two pounds.” PREFACE. The author of the following pages having been situated lor a number of years where the necessity of some general inform- ation on the subject of the art of Angling was daily seen, at first conceived the idea of publishing an American edition of Walton’s Complete Angler; but on a later and more care- ful perusal of its pages, and that of other writers, it was found that but little, comparatively, real practical knowledge could be given of the large variety of the fishes of our own country ; he therefore concluded to publish, in a small form, the opinions and practice of the various English authors, with remarks, thereon, and such information as could be gathered from American books and American sportsmen. Of the former, very few could be obtained : magazines and philosophical works were searched with but little success; the sportsmen were consulted, and much valuable information obtained; still there was a general lack of proper knowledge of the nature and habits of the great body of our northern and west- Vlil PREFACE. em fishes, and it was found a much more difficult matter than was at first imagined ; yet the necessity of the case seemed to invite a continuation of the task. With the object in view of a small pocket edition, of 150 pages, the work was commenced and prosecuted under many difficulties ; but it was found that the field was vast and almost unlimited ; that compared with England, a work to embrace all the varieties of the subject in the United States, would require the labor of many years, and almost countless pages. The work there- fore has been restricted to the description of fishes most gen- erally angled for in the United States. The writer has endea- vored to give in plain language, and as far as could be ascer- tained, the modes adopted by the anglers and experienced authors of both hemispheres, leaving the amateur, in many cases, a selection of all, according to his own views, as occa- sion may require. To the friends who have assisted him, and to the authors consulted, he considers himself under many obligations for the favors bestowed and the benefits derived. To those into whose hands the work may fall, he submits it as an humblo attempt to impart practical information on an interesting subject. / INTRODUCTION. In every library of any magnitude, there are well written histories of the tenants of the air, from the smallest insect to the “ feathered King ” that sits on the rocky tops of our ma- jestic hills, and emblems our glory to the world: and of that class, also, which walk the earth, from those that minister to or oppose our comfort and happiness, to the “ gigantic un- known,” whose ante-deluvian origin appears almost fabulous. Man has analyzed man; and it has been supposed that the intricate machinery of the greatest work of the Maker, was well understood, yet every day seems to give new and con- vincing proofs that our knowledge is yet but limited. The sciences of Phrenology, Electricity, Magnetism, and, more latterly, Mesmerism, are daily opening new fields to the learned and curious; and regions which have formerly been considered as explored to their utmost depths, now pi ove mines of inexhaustible inquiry. Europe has furnished a Goldsmith, a Buffon, a Linnjeus, and a Cuvier, and our own country has not been backward in scientific researches. 10 INTRODUCTION. Mr. Audubon, so well known to every American, has explor- ed the air, and opened to the world an enlarged and faithful picture of the feathered songsters of the Western Hemisphere. His History of Quadrupeds, also, promises for him a fame equal to that accorded any who have preceded him in this department. But amidst all these researches, but little, comparatively speaking, has been done in the Natural History of Fishes. The boundless ocean, with its vast waters, and numberless tributaries, remains unexplored : and the fact, that scientific inquirers of all ages, have neglected to penetrate so far into the philosophy of this branch of Nature’s productions as into many other departments of her wonderful and deep-hidden mysteries, is certainly a source both of surprise and regret. The objects that continually present themselves in our every day relations, naturally invite the attention and awaken an interest for the wonderful creations of Nature. Hence we have a history of Birds, Beasts, Insects; works on Botany, Geology, and Astronomy ; but as yet no standard treatise on Ichthyology. The dangers attending navigation, are by the aid of steam power becoming daily less formidable; and where but few could formerly be tempted, thousands now are induced to view the sublimity of Nature on the great deep, and will consequently be led to study the natural history of its inhabitants. Linmeus has defined nearly 400 species of fishes in the Old World, while our own country, possessing as it does great advantages over any other, cannot boast of a single treatise on a subject so fraught with interest to the admirer of Nature. INTRODUCTION. 11 The late Dr. Mitchell, of New-York, together with Governor De Witt Clinton, have furnished to the Literary and Philoso- phical Society of this city, a great amount of valuable scientific information on the natural history of the Fishes of the State of New-York. Dr. Smith, of Massachusetts, has written a very able work on the Fishes of his own State. But of the history of the fishes of our boundless western rivers and lakes, but little is known. The celebrated Buffon has said, 11 that in America animated nature is weaker, less active, and more circumscrib- ed in the variety of its productions, than in the old world : that there is some combination of elements, and other physi- cal causes, something that opposes its amplification; that there are obstacles to their development, and perhaps to the formation of large germs ; and that even those which, from the kindly influences of another climate, have acquired their complete form and expansion, shrink and diminish under a niggardly air and unprolific land ” ! ! How absurd and foolish a remark from a person whom knowledge, and that too of a great general character, should have taught better ! One is almost tempted to believe that it is tinged with envy. It is true, that at the time it was uttered, our resources were comparatively small, our institutions weak and enfeebled, and in fact our country itself but little known abroad ; yet the re- proach, even were the facts as stated, was ill-timed, and not in taste : its falsity is too plain to need comment. The plan adopted by many of our State Legislatures, of ordering geological surveys, bringing to its aid some of the best talent of the country, is well calculated to advance this science. As our country gradually progresses in wealth and 12 INTRODUCTION. prosperity, let us also advance in the culture of the sciences and arts; and although its age as a nation, will not admit of as great perfection in literary or scientific attainments as those of the old world, let there be no obstacles to the full devel- opment of its prolific power ; and we may then hope that that day is not far distant, when the Natural History of America shall be as thoroughly explored as that of the mother coun- try, giving valuable and important scientific information to the inquirer after knowledge as well as to the lover of aquatic sports. INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON ANGLING. Angling, from the earliest periods of the world, has been considered a source both of amusement and profit. Walton, or old Izak, as lie is more familiarly called, in his remarks on the Antiquity of Angling, goes back as far as the days of the sons of Adam, and the Book of Job, in which latter he proves the first mention of fish-hooks. The earliest authentic infor- mation, however, we have of Angling as an amusement, can l>e dated as far back as the days of the Romans. Trajan, the Roman Emperor, is mentioned as one who loved Angling, and also, if we may credit history, of eating the result of his days’ sport in epicurean style. Plutarch also speaks of Mark An- tony and Cleopatra as using angling as a principal recreation ! We know little, however, of any perfection in the art, until the year 1486, when a treatise on the subject was published by a lady, celebrated at that time for her beauty and ac- complishments, entitled “ The Treatyse of Fyssynge with an Angle, by Dame Julyana Berners, Prioress of the Nun- nery near St. Albans.” The book would at the present day be considered a curiosity, if we may judge from the follow- ing quaint extract, in which she shows llio superiority of fishing over fowling: “ The Angler atte the leest, hath his holsom walke, and mery at his ease, a swete ayro of the swete sauoure of the mede floures, that makyth him hungry ; he liereth the melo- 14 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON ANGLING. dyous armony of fowles ; lie seeth the yongo swaunes, hee- rons, duckes, cotes, and many other fowles, wyth theyr brodes ; whycho me semyth better than alle the noyse of houndys, the blastes of homys, and the scrye of foulis, that hunters, fawkenere, and fowlers can make. And if the angler take fysshe ; surely, thenne, is there noo man merier than he is in his spyryte.” Walton also makes mention of a Dr. Nowell, Dean of the Cathedral of St. Paul’s, and author of the present Church Catechism, who lived in the reign of Henry the Eighth. He is represented as a good man, a constant practiser of an"lin» and as employing the tenth part of his time in that sport. In an ancient picture, (which would, by the way, be rather more curious than the book above-mentioned) he is represented as leaning with one hand on a desk, holding a Bible, whilst at his side lie lus lines, hook, and other tackle, with several kinds of rods ; underneath is written “ that he died in 1601 at the age of 95 years ; that age had neither dimmed his eyes nor weakened his memory; and that Angling and Temperance were the causes of these blessings.” Sir Henry Wotton, who lived about the same period says, “ ’twas an employment for his idle time, which was not then idly spent ; for Anglin" was after tedious study a rest to his mind; a cheerer of his spirits; a diverter of sadness ; a calmer of unquiet thoughts ; a mode- rator of passions ; a procurer of contentedness.” Joe Davors,* who wrote about the same time, runs prettily off in this style : J “hot me live harmlessly; and near the brink Of Trent or Avon have a dwelling place; Where I may see iny rjuill or cork down sink, With eager bite of porch, or roach, or dace; And on tho world and my Creator think; Whilst some men strive ill gotten goods t’ crabraco, * John Dennys, Esq., author of “ Socrets of Angling,” A. D. 1613. INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON ANGLING. 15 And others spend their time in base excess Of wine, or worse, in war and wantonness. “ Let them that list, these pastimes still pursue, And in such pleasing fancies feed their fill; So I the fields and meudows green may view, And doily by fresh rivers walk at will, Among the daisies and the violets blue, Red hyacinth, and yellow dalTodil, Purple narcissus like the morning rays, Pale gander-grass, and azure culver-keys. “I count it higher plensuro to behold The stately compass of the lofty sky , And in the mist thereof, like burning gold, The flaming chariot of the world’s great eye ; The watery clouds that in the air up-roll’d, With sundry kinds of painted colors fly ; And fair Aurora, lifting up her head, Still blushing, rise from old Tithouus' bed. “ The hills aud mountains raised from the plains, The plains extended level with the ground; The grounds divided into sundry veins, The veins enclosed with rivers running round; The rivers making way through nature’s chains With headlong course into the sea profound; The raging sea, beneath the valleys low, Where lakes, and rills, and rivulets do flow. “ The lofty woods, the forests wide and long," Adorn’d with leaves and branches fresh and green, In whose cold bowers the birds with many a song, Do welcome with their choir the Summer’s queen; The meadows fair, where Flora’s gifts among Aro intermix’d with vordant gross between ; The silver scaled fish that softly swim Within the sweet brook’s chrystal, wutery stream. “ All these, and many more of His creation That made the heavens, the Angler oft doth see ; 16 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON ANGLING. Taking therein no little delectation, To think how strange, how wonderflil thoy be ; Framing thereof an inward contemplation To set his heart from other fancies free : And whilst he looks on these with joyful eye, His mind is wrapt ubove the starry sky.” If Angling can give birth to such pleasant and wholesome thoughts as these, who will deny that it is an employment both profitable and amusing ? Walton further says, that « it is the contemplative man’s recreation ; for it is eminently calculated to still the stormy passions of the breast, and lead to the calm and tranquil pleasures arising from frequent meditation of the beauties of nature. ” What more powerful argument can the Angler have in justification of this amusement? Volumes could not have said more. Sir Humphrey Davy remarks: “ For my health, I may thank my ancestors, after my God: and I have not squander- dered what was so bountifully given : and though I do not expect, like our Arch-Patriarch Walton, to number ninety years and upwards, yet I hope as long as 1 can enjoy a vernal day, the warmth and light of the sunbeams, still to haunt the streams, following the example of our late venerable friend, the President of the Royal Academy,” with whom I have thrown the fly, caught trout, and enjoyed a delightful day of angling and social amusement, by the bright clear streams of the Wandle.” The celebrated Dr. Paley said, in reply to a person anx- ious about the completion of one of his great philosophical works, that ” it would be finished as soon as the fly-fishing season was over;” evidently considering this diversion of equal importance with those mental efforts that have render- ed his name almost immortal. Benjamin West. INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON ANGLING. 17 Gay, Thompson, John Tobin, R. T. Coleridge, Pro- fessor Wilson, Sir Walter Scott, and Sir Francis Chan- try, were all ardent disciples of Walton; and Admiral Lord Nelson was so passionately fond of the sport, that he fished with his left hand a long time after he had lost his right. Benjamin West, who enjoyed many a day’s sport with Sir Humphrey Davy, was an American Painter; and to come down to our own day, IIy, Inman, one of the best American Painters living, now on a visit to Europe, divides his time partly in painting the portraits of the nobles of England, and partly in the noble sport of trout and salmon fishing, in the beautiful lakes and rivers of Scolland. Daniel Webster finds relief, after a tedious winter’s session of Congress, in angling for salmon in the Kennebec, and for trout in the various streams of Massachusetts. It is said, moreover, that this distinguished statesman is quite as much at home in preparing a kettle of chowder, as he is in the halls of legislation at Washington; and Martin Van Buren is acknowledged to be equally successful in angling for pickerell as in the cultivation of his beautiful farm. Many other names of distinguished men, who Oft have tried with baited hook To tempt the tenant of the brook, could be added to this list, to prove that angling is held in high regard by all classes of people, but it is unnecessary. The observant reader will draw his own conclusions. When, however, we take into consideration the extent of our country, its many beautiful streams and quiet lakes, where the finny tribe abound, we will find that the number of an- glers, when compared with that of England, is astonishingly small. But the fact is, (and a deplorable one it is, too,) that the majority of the American people are so much engaged in “ getting rich,” that they scarcely ever think of enjoying the 18 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON ANOLINO. solid pleasures of this life, until, by the fatigues and perplexi- ties of business, they are better fitted for the grave, than for any proper and healthy recreation. An eminent divine and sound philosopher of this city, in a discourse a short time since, remarking on the habits of the people of this country, said: “that they always seemed to be in a state of perpetual excitement — one continual hurry and bustle ; and that it would not be surprising to him to see half of the population of New-York fall down in its streets in epi- leptic fits; and that chronic diseases, in most cases caused by excessive mental excitement, close application, and want of air and proper exercise, were fearfully on the increase.” Walton says, “And for you, that have heard many grave and serious men pity anglers, let me tell you sir, there be many men that are by others taken to be serious and grave men, which we contemn and pity. Men that are taken to be grave because nature hath made them of a sour complexion — money-getting men — men that spend all their time first in gelling, and next in anxious care to keep it — men that are condemned to be rich, and then always busy or discontented ; for these poor rich men, we anglers pity them perfectly, and stand in no need to borrow their thoughts to think ourselves so happy.” No, troth, we should be very sorry to borrow anything from persons of this stamp, much less their thoughts, the poorest things probably by far in their possession. Good Isaac, verily thou didst know human nature ! It is true, as Walton has remarked, that many have ridi- culed this noble science and pitied its followers ; but let those whose extreme and somewhat morbid sensibilities have ren- dered them blind to the beauties of nature, remember that he “ who went about doing good,” chose a number of his apostles from among fishermen, and considered them worthy objects of his confidence and love. It seems, in fine, a work of supererogation to attempt to INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON ANGLING. 19 justify this agreeable pastime, after the expressed opinions of so many learned and distinguished men of every age ; and let us ask the reader if there is any recreation at once so harm- less, and with which so many happy associations are blended — which combines so many rational inducements to health and true enjoyment, as Angling. 41 Adieu ! ye sports of Noise and Toil That Crowds in senseless strife embroil ; The Jockey’s Mirth, the Huntsman’s Train, Debauch of Health, and wasto of Gain, More mild Delight my Lifo employ, The ANGLER’S uncxpeusivc Joy. Hero I can sweeten Fortune’s Frowns, Nor envy Kings tho Bliss of Crowns.” Brookes on Angling, 17C6. CHAPTER I. ON THE MATERIALS USED IN ANGLING. *' My rod and my lino, my float and my lead, My hook and iny plummet, my whetstone and knifo, My basket, my baits, both living and dead, My not, and my meat, for that is my chief, Then I must have thread, and hairs green and small, With mine ‘ Angling Purse * — and so you have all.” Walton. “ You must have all these, and twice as many more, with which, if you meao to be a fisher, you must store yourself.”— I dem. It is necessary, in order to become a successful Angler, to have a complete assortment of tackle ; and as many Anglers pefer making and arranging their own materials, it will not be improper to give here a list of the articles which con- stitute a well arranged Angler’s establishment. Therefore, let the sportsman provide himself with the following articles : Salmon and Trout Rods for both bait and fly-fishing ; rods for bass and pickerel ; and also for bridge fishing and troll- ing ; spare tops of different sizes. Lines of silk, silk and hair, twisted and platted, silk-worm gut, India grass ; and hemp, or flax lines for trolling or sea fishing. Reels or Winches, small and large, for light or heavy fishing. MATERIALS USED IN ANGLING — RODS. 21 Hooks of various patterns, from No. 0 to 12, on silk-worm gut, hair, gimp or wire, snap-hooks for trolling, hooks on hemp lines, &c., loose hooks of all sizes. Floats of quill, cork, or wood, of various sizes. Sinkers, plaiu, swivel and hollow, for sea, middle or bot- tom fishing, split shot, and swivels for fly-fishing. Leaders of hair, gut or grass, of various lengths, loose gut for making or repairing leaders or tying on hooks, and gimp or wire for pickerel tackle. Squids of pearl, ivory, bone, tin or lead, for sea or river trolling, artificial flies, minnows, grasshoppers, frogs, mice, shrimp, &c. Disgorgers of various sizes, bait needles, clearing rings, bait and landing nets, bait box, and baskets. A Book containing a full assortment of artificial flies ; a box containing a variety of feathers, worsted, silks of all colors, gold thread, shoemakers’ wax, Sec . ; also, a book for general tackle. A pair of plyers, a pair of scissors, a penknife, hand vice, and a file for sharpening the points and barbs of hooks. RODS. There is probably no article of tackle upon which the An- gler looks with so much pride and pleasure, as a good Rod; like the fowler’s gun, or the jockey’s horse — next to his wife, they are always the best. They are made of various kinds of woods, and of various lengths, for the different spe- cies of Angling. The best rods were formerly imported from England, and made of hazel or hickory, but they were little adapted to our modes of fishing, and have consequently grown into disuse. American rod makers have introduced great im provements in the article within the last ten years, and caD now turn out rods which, for workmanship and beauty of finish, cannot be surpassed. They are made to suit the tastes L 22 RODS. of all Anglers, from the single ferruled rod for the novice, at the cost of from $2 to $5, to the more expensive one of the scientific Angler, varying from $5 to $50. Those now in ge- neral use are made either from ash, bamboo, Calcutta reed, or lance wood. The three former woods are preferred by good Anglers ; the latter wood is objected to on account of its weight, and as it is the main object of the sportsman to have his tackle as light as strength and durability will permit, this description is seldom used. There aro three requisites for all good rods, viz. strength, lightness and pliability; and it is absolutely necessary that the wood should be of such a na- ture as to admit of a uniform flexibility from butt to top. Rods for salmon are usually from 18 to 20 feet in length, the butt made of well seasoned maple, the second and third joints of ash, and the fourth joint, or top, of lance wood ; and if for fly-fishing, the top should bo in three pieces, neatly spliced, say in equal proportions of lance wood, bamboo, and whalebone. For striped, or black bass, and pickerel, a rod from 12 to 15 feet in length is used; the butt of ash, the second and third joints of ash or bamboo, (this latter wood is preferred by many Anglers on account of its lightness and toughness, and if it can bo procured, is quite as good as the best ash,) the last joint, or top, of lance wood. The Calcutta reed also makes a very good rod, when it can be had of a regular taper, and free from worm-holes, or other imperfections, and is used mounted with rings, in its natural state, or cut up into joints, and ferruled. Some country Anglers prefer these rods in their rough state, and will send many miles to procure them. Those of the city sportsmen, also, who have their regular fishing grounds, provide an extra rod of this description, which they generally leave at the tavern where they stop. They cost but little, and if kept in a proper manner, will suYe RODS. 23 the Angler much trouble ; as, in case of accident, his rod is always at the place of destination. The rods used for Trout are from 12 to 1C feet in length; the butt of maple, the second and third joints of ash or lance wood, and the last joint, or top, of lance wood, for bait ; if for fly-fishing, of spliced lance wood, bamboo, and whale-bone, similar to the salmon rod : in fact, a trout rod may be called a small salmon rod, and is very often used for the same pur- pose. The general rod is very useful in travelling where the Angler expects a variety of sport. It is composed of various kinds of woods, with a hollow butt, commonly of maple, and is made to coutain several spare tops, of different sizes, by which it can be altered to suit any kind of fishing. The walking-cane rod, if well made, is also a very useful article for travelling, or where the Angler does not wish his business or profession known. Each joint is made to slide into another, and the whole is contained in a hollow butt, similar to the walking-cane. Tliis rod suits very well for trout, perch, or any light fishing, but will not answer for heavy fishing, as it cannot be made sufficiently large to be strong. Heavy rods have been made to slide into metaleases, but they are large, and more inconvenient to carry than the ordinary jointed rod. The true Angler should if possible have a separate rod for each kind of fishing. All the varieties of rods above men- tioned are for sale at the principal tackle stores in the Union, put up in compact form, in linen, woollen, and canvas bags, or neat leather cases. The Angler will therefore bear in mind, that in choosing a rod of any description, it is necessary to observe that it is perfectly straight, tight in the joints, without shaking, a grad ual tapering from butt to end, and that it springs equally in all its parts. 24 REELS. REELS. Many old-fashioned Anglers think that this is a superfluous article in the equipment of a sportsman ; hut to any one who has used it, it is almost as indispensable as the rod itself. The main object of the reel is to give the fish a sufficient quantity of line to tire itself, and consequently affords more sport than could be obtained by the rod alone. By means also of this valuable accessory, fish of almost incredible weight, may be captured where the rod would prove utterly useless. They are generally made of brass or German silver, and are of two kinds, simple and compound, or plain and multi- plying. Those used for trout, perch, or any kind of light fishing, are mostly imported from England, and hold from 20 to 50 yards of line. The majority of good Anglers prefer a multiplying reel, because they can wind up much faster, and consequently enjoy more sport in the same length of time; some prefer the plain reel on account of its simplicity, and object to the multiplier on opposite grounds, and also reason that with a heavy fish, the wheels of the multiplier are apt to be clogged by friction, or bent by pressure. This may apply to the cheap imported reels, but not to those of American manufacture, which have almost entirely superseded the fo- reign; in fact, with the exception of artificial baits, all articles of tackle made in this country are equal, if not superior, to those of England ; and if the Angler can procure the Ameri- can, he should patriotically avoid any thing else. The reels used in bass or salmon fishing, are manufactur- ed altogether in this country, and are calculated to hold from 50 to 200 yards of line each. They are made of the best hammered brass, or German silver, with balance handles, without stops, and with plain or steel bushings. They run with little friction, and the least possible noise, and when in perfect order arc the pride of the scientific Angler. LINES — HOOKS. 25 LINES. Lines are made of silk, silk and hair, gut, India grass, flax, hemp, and cotton. They vary in size and length — coming from the size of a hair to that of a quarter of an inch, and in some cases even thicker, and being from 12 to 200 yards long. A line for trout, should be either of silk, silk and hair, India grass, or fine flax ; the most common one in use, how- ever, for this fish, is the India grass, which is to be had in lengths of from 12 to 20 yards, and of various sizes. The silk plaitted line has an extensive reputation in England for this species of angling, as also that of twisted silk and hair. They are expensive, but considered by far the best for trout and salmon fishing. For salmon, lake pickerel, black or striped bass, the lines in general use are made of flax, hemp, grass, silk, or hair, all of which can be obtained in lengths of from 50 to 200 yards. The cotton and hemp lines (50 to 100 yards long) are used in trolling for blue fish, bass, pickerel, or any kind of sea fish. The size and length of a line should always vary in pro- portion to the sport anticipated. For instance, you cannot have too fight a fine in clear trout streams, provided it is strong enough to take your fish ; and the same rule may also apply to striped bass, salmon, apd other timid fish. On the subject of fines generally, much must be left to the discretion and judgment of the sportsman. HOOKS. There is no article of tackle of so much importance to the Angler, and concerning which such a variety of opinion exists, as the Hook. 26 HOOKS . The most common Hook in use in this country is the u Kirby , ” which the reader will perceive is not included in either of the plates, for the reason, that until a few years since, it has been the only kind in use, and consequently its shape and construction are well known to every sports- man. The sizes and numbers are similar to the “ Lim- erick,” so that a person wishing to procure a Kirby Hook, can do so by giving the number of the Limerick pattern. These hooks derive their name from one Kirby, who first made them, according to instructions given him by Prince Rupert, a member of the Royal Society of London. They vary materially in shape, being more or less kirb'd * or bent; high or low in the point ; with long or short shanks, some marked, and others flatted. Those with flatted shanks are used in taking salt water fish only — such as black-fish, por- gies, eels, flounders, &c., where a hemp line is attached. Those with marked or indented shanks are tied to gut, hair, or other light materials, and are used in all kinds of fresh water fishing. There are many cheap hooks of the Kirby description, imported and sold in this country.f Within a few years, an inferior quality, made in Germany, has been sold at cheap rates and in large quantities to the country trade. Hooks of this latter quality may always be tested (as in fact may any hook) by merely sticking the barb into a pine board and pulling moderately ; it will be found as brittle as glass. It may not be improper to state here, that one of the reasons why the Kirby hook has gone into comparative dis- use, is because the Limerick, for fine fishing, is far superior, and has consequently superseded them ; although the former, * A phrase denoting the peculiarity in all Kirby hooks, derivod from the name of the inventor. t There aro many goods imported, and labelled “ manufactured ex- pressly for the American market ,” which are absolutely unfit for any market PLATE 1. umkrick. trout. Plate 2. • HOOKS . 27 when of fine quality, are still preferred by many scientific Anglers. Plate No. 1, represents the best pattern of Limerick book now' in use. They are, as the reader will perceive, perfectly straight, without the slightest* kirb or bend, the point and barb delicately finished, and the hook neatly japanned black, to prevent corrosion. Its great superiority, over any other hook, consists in its perfect adaptation to artificial fly-fishing ; in fact, it is rarely the case that any other hook is used for that purpose. They were originally invented and made by one O’Shaughnessy, of Limerick. Sir Humphrey Davy, in his “ Salmonia,” says : “ I never use any hooks for salmon fishing, except those I am sure have been made by O’Shaughnessy, of Limerick. ”t He also gives the following method of tempering hooks : “ It is requisite that the iron be pure and malleable, such as is procured from old horse-shoe nails, which we believe to be generally made from Swedish iron. This should be cemented with charcoal into good soft steel, and that into wires of different sizes.” The original O’Shaughnessy hook thus highly spoken of, is not made of wire like the ordinary hook, but is forged and hammered into shape from the rough steel, which gives an opportunity of varying the form, and of throwing proper strength into those parts of the hook which most require it. This latter advant- age, it w'ill be remembered, cannot be attained iu the ordi- nary wire hooks. Their general superiority, as Anglers say, consists in their excellence of temper, perfection of the barb, shape of the bend, and position of strength. The price of the * Some Anglers prefer tho Limerick slightly kirb’d, which can bo ensily done by subjecting them to a moderate heat in tho flame of u cau- dle, and bonding them with a pair of plyers. t Professor Rennie objects to Davy’s opinion, and says that inferior hooks wero made at that time, but good hooks could bo had both at London and Birmingham. 28 HOOKS. O’Shaughnessy hooks in Limerick, vary from onc-and-six- pence to four shillings sterling per dozen, and when the cost of importation is added thereto, it will be found that they are rather expensive. The style and shape of the best Limerick hook described in Plate No. 1, when well made, and properly tempered, however, give satisfaction to the majority of Anglers. Those marked “ Limerick Trout ” are in general use for trout or perch ; and Those marked “ Limerick Salmon .” for pickerell, bass, weak-fish, salmon, or salmon trout. The hooks designated in Plate No. 2, as numbers 1 and 2, are the kinds used for black-fish, eels, and flounders. Number 1 represents the ordinary round bent black-fish hook, and number 2 the Virginia hook. This latter was originally made to suit the fishing south of the Delaware, and is highly esteemed in that region of country, where it finds a large and ready sale. The numbers are the same as those of the Limerick pattern. No. 3 represents the “ Aberdeen " pattern, which is made of small blued steel wire, with a perfectly round bend, low point and long shank. It is used by some Anglers for weak-fish, trout, salmon, and salmon trout. Nos. 4 and 5 are correct drawings of the “ Pickerell Spring Snap Hook," which the reader will notice consists of three hooks. The small hook, used for the bait, is placed at the top, whilst the two larger ones, made of spring steel, are lower down, and slide in a groove. No. 5 shows the hook at rest. The exertions used by the fish, when finding him- self caught, will naturally cause him to run, (if it may be so called,) and in so doing he pulls the hooks down, and thus springs them, securing him more safely than could be done with a common hook. No. 4 presents the hook in a state of action, and one too, it would appear, rather uncomfortable to HOOKS — SINKERS, & C . 29 the member of the “ finny family.” This hook is much UBed in Europe, and produces good sport. The single pickerell hook is numbered 6, on Plate 2, and is a stout hook, either bent or straight. The double pickerell hook is numbered 7 on the same plate, and is made of a single piece of wire, similar to the last. It has been found necessary, from the great voracity of this fish, to attach twisted brass wire, or gimp, instead of gut or line, to the hook used in angling for them. The weak trout hook, which is a superior quality of Kirby, made of slim wire, with a long shank, similar to the Aber- deen, will be found an excellent hook for trout, salmon, or bass. Since the establishment of a manufactory of hooks in this country, the Angler can gratify his own taste in selection, but he must bear in mind that a great portion of his success de- pends upon the quality of these small articles of his equip- ment, and he should therefore take particular care to choose those that are well tempered. Let him test every hook be- fore attaching it to liiB line, and see that the barb and point are perfect and sharp. A small file will be found convenient for this latter purpose. SINKERS, DIPSIES, OR LEADS, AND SWIVELS, &c. These articles of tackle are believed to be peculiar to this country — no mention of them being made in English works on Angling, split shot and bullets being used in their stead. There are throe kinds in use, the Plain, Slide, and Swivel Sinkers. The first of these, the Plain Sinker, is made of lead, with brass wire loops at each end, and of various sizes, from a quarter of an ounce in weight, for trout or perch fishing, to that of one or two pounds for sea angling. 30 SINKERS, Sc C. — FLOATS. The Slide Sinker, is nothing more or less than a thick lead tube, slightly rounded at each end. It is used princi- pally in bottom fishing ; the object of the tube being to allow the line to pass through at the least motion of the fish, which is thus immediately felt. It is considered much bettor than the old plan, where the fish moves the weight of the sinker, before the Angler has notice of his luck. The Swivel Sinker is decidedly the best in use for any kind of fishing, and is made similar to the Plain, with the ex- ception of the swivels at each end, instead of the plain sta- tionary loops. Tliis arrangement gives the double advantage, both of “ spinning ” the bait in trolling, and of preventing the line from twisting, and consequent entanglement of the leaders, hooks, &c. Split Shot are used almost universally for trout fishing. They should be quite small, and where greater weight is ne- cessary, should be used in larger numbers rather than of large size, as these latter make much noise when the line is thrown, and are apt to frighten the fish. Swivels are used for “ spinning ” bait, and for preventing entanglement of the line. They are placed in various parts of the tackle, but usually on the gut-length, or leader, and should be a necessary appendage to the equipment. Should this chapter prove rather heavy for the patience of the reader, it is to be hoped that the buoyancy of the next may enable him to recover his equilibrium. FLOATS. Floats are made of quills, cork, and red cedar, of various sizes, adapted to the current of water, or the peculiar descrip- , tion of angling, and are of two shapes, egg and oblong. The float used for trout is generally made of quills or cork, and caimot be too light for fishing in clear streams ; SILK-WORM GUT, LEADERS, & C . 31 where the current is strong or water muddy, a larger float may be used without inconvenience. For bass, pickerell, or splmon, there are two kinds of floats employed, the cork, and that made of hollow red cedar, which are made of different sizes, varying from three to eight inches in length, and of neat proportions. Those of red cedar are very light, and much preferred in angling for bass and weak-fish, in the vicinity of New-York. SILK-WORM GUT, LEADERS, &c. This extraordinary substance is comparatively little known, except among dealers and scientific anglers. It is manufactured in large quantities in Spain, and sent thence to London, Edinburgh, and the United States.* It is a source of much surprise, and by many viewed as incredible, that this gut is taken from the silk-worm, at the time when it is about to spin. The size of the gut varies according to the capacity of the worm, some strands being as small as a fine hair, while others are as thick as the 1-32 part of an inch. It is a beauti- ful, semi-transparent substance, and is in strands of from twelve to twenty inches in length, but usually not exceeding fifteen inches. When used by the Angler, it becomes quite soft and pliable, but at the same time extremely strong and durable. It is almost imperceptible in the water, and if of * Inferior qualities of this article arc manufactured in China and Italy, but the best is imported from Alioant , in Spuin. No mention is made of it3 over having boon succcrslully manufactured in uuy other country Mr. Durund, of Jersey-City, opposite New-York, succeeded iu making como a few years ago, but the strunds wore entirely too short to bo use- fill to the Angler. Latterly, however, au enterprising Amoricau in the same neighborhood, has had still better succoss, and produced some al- most equal to the Spuuish. lie is still experimenting, and will no doubt succeed to his entire satisfaction. 32 LANDING AND BAIT-TCETS, &C. good quality, and carefully used, will outlast anything of the kind which can be procured. It is used singly, twisted, aqd plaitted for lines, leaders or snells, for hooks. The smallest sizes are used for trout, and the larger, when of superior quality, are highly esteemed and in great demand for salmon or bass. Leaders are made from the above-mentioned article, twisted horse-hair, and India grass, and should always be as light as possible. LANDING AND BAIT-NETS, GAFF-HOOKS, AND CLEARING-RINGS. In the pleasure of anticipation, the enthusiastic fisherman is very apt to forget many little things which are very im- portant items in the success of his day’s sport ; among these are the articles enumerated above. The Landing-Net in ordinary use is made of linen twine, or fish-line, sixteen inches in diameter, and about two feet in depth, with a mesh of three-eighths of an inch, and is at- tached to a stout wire ring, of iron or brass. The latter ma- terial is better adapted to the purpose, for the reason that it does not corrode the net, whereas with almost every precau- tion, the former cannot be prevented from acting on the twine. The handle should be made of stout hickory or ash, and not less than five feet in length. A very convenient form of this net is now made, and which occupies about half the space of the ordinary net. The ring or hoop is composed of three joints or hinges, by which it is folded into a very port- able shape. The handle to this contrivance, in order to carry out the principles of its space-ecouomizing inventor, is made of three joints, which slide into each other like a telescope, or, as Blaine, in his “ Rural Sports,” calls it, “ a swallowed- up handle .” LANDING AND BAIT-NETS, & C . 33 The Bait-Net is made in a similar maimer to the Landing, but of small size, for shrimp, minnows, spearing, or like fish. It should be about twelve inches in diameter by eighteen inches deep, with a quarter inch mesh. The Oaf-Hook is found to be very important in securing large fish after their strength is expended, and where the landing-net cannot be used. The hook is usually about four inches in length, with or without a barb ; but as the latter is the more safe hook of the two, it is preferred. The handle should be of hickory or ash, and from five to six feet in length. The Clearing-Ring is a useful article to the Angler in difficulty , (for he is not wholly infallible, and will occasionally have some trouble,) and as Walton says the fisher should be patient and not swear, his disciples, to prevent any thing of the kind, should avail themselves of this valuable implement. The most simple and useful is made of iron, or stout lead, and is in the form of a ring of from four to six ounces in weight, and about three inches in diameter, with a joint or hinge similar to that in the net bow before described. It is at- tached to a stout line, about twelve or fifteen yards in length, and when needed is opened, placed around the line, and sent down as a messenger. The reader can probably infer from the name, the use to which this ring is applied ; it is found very serviceable in removing any obstructions which the Angler may encounter in the enjoyment of his sport. It may bo well to observe here that in many cases this little appara- tus should only be used with the oil of “ patience,” so highly spoken of by Walton. This brings us to the last item of the materials of the An- gler’s equipment, which however necessarily tedious in the minuthe of explanation, will, we trust, be relieved by other more interesting, or at least amusing, parts of the Angler’s instructions. CHAPTER IT. ON BAITS USED IN ANGLING. The most common Bait used in this country for ensnaring almost all varieties of the finny tribe that inhabit fresh water, is the common earth-worm, or, as it is called, dew-worm, dug- worm, and the angle-worm ; which latter, from its univer- sal use in angling, would be the most proper name. It can generally be obtained by digging a foot or two in the ground, except in sandy soils, which produce clear streams, and where the fly will be found the better bait. Another method, recommended by Blaine, is “ to walk cautiously over close cut lawns, or clean fed meadows, with a caudle or lantern, during the night. If the weather be moist, and the search be conducted with a very light tread, almost any quantity may be procured ; for as they are blind, it is not the light but the motion which disturbs them.” When they are not wanted for immediate use, a good plan is, to wet 6ome straw, or hay, and lay it on the ground for a few days, by which means they will be brought to the top, and can be easily gathered. An- other, and a more expeditious plan, practised by W alton, and others, is to tako the green leaves of the walnut-tree, and squeeze the juice into fresh or salt water, and pour it on the ground, which will make them rise in a very short time. The common White Grub- Worm, is also a very good bait, and will often tako trout when all others have failed. They BAITS . 35 can bo procured in the Spring of the year, underneath decay- ed trees, foliage, stumps, &c., and sometimes in fresh ploughed ground. The Grasshopper is an excellent bait for trout, when in season, and is approved by all Anglers. The Minnow , that beautiful little fish so highly esteemed among all English sportsmen, is found in many of our streams, under a variety of names, and makes a good trout, pickerell, or salmon bait. The trout or salmon Spawn , however, takes the lead as the best trout bait in the world ; so much so, that many An- glers in Europe deem it unworthy a sportsman to use it. Wasps, Beetles, Flics, Caterpillars, Locusts ,* and many other insects, also make very good trout baits. The Frog, used whole or in parts, is one of the best baits for pickerell. The hind legs, when skinned, which operation leaves them perfectly white, is preferred. The Shiner or Mullet, the Gold-Fish, and in fact any small fish, is acceptable to tliis all-devouring subject of the Angler’s toil. For salt water angling, the Shrimp, like the worm in fresh water, takes its place as the best bait, and is a great favorite with all anglers for striped bas9 or weak-fish. The Shedder-Crab, when it can be procured, is a dainty morsel and a most killing bait for striped bass many of the largest fish being taken with it. The Soft-Shell Clam, when cut up into small pieces, makes a very good bait for black-fish, flounders, or any kind of sea fish. These are the only kinds of baits in general use ; many others are occasionally used, but are not worthy of special * In the summer of 1843, Locusts wero used as a bait for weak-fish, in the Hudson river, opposito Hoboken, with great success. 36 BAITS . notice. The Angler, to insure success, should always take a variety of baits: as the fish, like the fisher, in his tastes is often hard to please. In addition to the abovementioned baits, the following f taken from “ Hofland’s Angler’s Manual,” and used with much success in England, may be found useful to the Angler. The Marsh- Worm , is smaller than the dew-worm, and of a paler color, with a broad flat tail. It is an excellent bait for trout, when well scoured, and two of them may be used on a hook. The Brandling , is streaked from head to tail in round ringlets, alternately red and yellow, and is found in old dung- hills, but chiefly where various kinds of dung are mixed to- gether, and in decayed tanners’ bark. It is considered a fine bait for trout, perch, or eels. The Little Gilt-Tail , or Tag- Worm , is of a pale yellow towards the tail, and knotted like the dung-hill red-worm, and found in old horse-dung. The Red- Worm. This worm is small, and of a bright red. It is found in old manure heaps, in decayed tanners’ bark, and on the borders of old drains, and is higlily spoken of for almost every kind of fresh water fish. The Pcacock-Red, or Black-Headed Red- Worm, is found under cow or horse-dung, three parts dried in the fields, but chiefly under cow-dung. He is also found under stones in the beds of rivers, and is a good trout worm. The Gentle, or Maggot, is a universal bait, and will take any kind of fresh water fish, save salmon and pike. It is a very killing bait for trout. The Cadis, or Cad-Bait , and Straw- Worm , are found in the shallow, sandy parts of rivers, small brooks, and even ditches. The first is a yellowish grub, with a reddish head, and is covered with a case or husk of straw, bark, bits of BAITS . 37 rushes, particles of gravel, &c., and with this covering to shelter it, is enabled, by protruding its head, to creep on the bottom of the stream where it is found. There is another similar kind, of several varieties, called the straw-worm, which produce different sorts of flies. They are all excellent bait for trout. The Cow-Dung, Bob, or Clap-Bait, is found in the fields, and old pastures, under cow-dung, from April to September. It is something larger than the gentle, has a reddish head, and is a capital bait for trout. They may be preserved in a tin box, with a little of the earth from which they were taken. The Dock Grub, is a large white grub, a reddish head, and is found in the root of the common water-dock from April to June. A killing bait for trout, by dropping into a gentle stream, or a Btill deep hole. The Oak Grub is a small green caterpillar, and may be procured in the months of June, July, and August, by shaking the branches of an oak tree over a sheet or table-cloth. They should be preserved in a large tin box, with a few of the oak leaves in it. A most successful bait for trout. Bobs. These are found by following the plough in Spring and Autumn ; they are twice the size of a gentle, and have red heads — are good bait for trout. The Ash Grub, is found under the oak, ash, and beach, when filled, and when they have lain a long time on the ground ; also in the hollow of those trees when rotten. They are very tender, require careful handling, and are excellent for trout. The majority of these baits without doubt can be found in similar locations in this country; perhaps not in the same months as in England, but in as great perfection and numbers, and possibly as tempting baits for fish of the same description. How to scour and preserve worms. — The practice of 38 BAITS. scouring and preserving worms, is little practised in this country among Anglers generally ; but as the method is very simple, it should be followed by all sportsmen, on account of the increased activity, brightness, and toughness it gives to this favorite bait. A variety of modes are recommended by different writers. The best method is to take a quantity of moss, which can readily be procured in any part of the coun- try, wash it well, and squeeze it till nearly dry, after which place it in an earthem pot together with your worms. A few days will be sufficient to make them thoroughly scoured, and fit for use. They can be preserved in the same manner for a number of weeks, by changing and washing the moss every three or four days. Should any of them be found sickly or dead, they should be immediately removed, or they will eventually destroy the others. The mode of bailing hooks with worms . — “ To bait with a single worm, enter the point of the hook a little below the head, threading it carefully, without breaking or bruising it, to within a quarter of an inch of the tail j the shank of the hook must bo well covered with the worm.” “To bait with two worms on a hook, enter your hook at the head of the first worm, and bring it out at the middle, and then draw it over the arming* of your hook on the line, then enter the hook at the middle of the second worm, and bring it up to within one quarter of an inch of the head ; draw down the first worm till it meet the second, and your bait will then travel freely on the bottom.” Another mode of baiting with a single worm, is to enter the point of the hook at the head, and bring it carefully down to within a quarter of an inch of the tail ; and if the worm bo * Tho place whore tho hook is tied or wkippod on. BAITS. 39 . very large, part of it may be drawn above the arming of the hook on to the line. — Hojland. “ To bait with a brandling. The point of your hook is to be put in at the very tag of his tail, and run up his body quite over all the arming, and still stripped on an inch at least upon the gut, the head and remaining part hanging downward. “ The Grubs are to be bailed thus: It will be necessary to wrap on a piece of stiff hair or gut, with your arming, leaving it standing out about a straw’s breadth at the end of your hook. The hook is to be put in under the head or chaps of the bait, and guided down the middle of the belly, without suffering it to peep out of the way, (for then the ash-grub, especially, will issue out water and milk till nothing but the skin shall remain, and the bend of the hook shall appear black through it,) till the point of your hook come so low that the head of your bait may rest, and stick upon the hair or gut that stand out to hold it, by which means it can neither slip of it- self, neither will the force of the stream, nor quick pulling out upon any mistake, strip it off. “ The Cadis may be put on to the hook two or three to- gether, and is sometimes (to very great effect) joined to a worm, and sometimes to an artificial fly, to cover the point of tile hook, but is always to be angled with, (when by itself especially,) with the finest tackle, and is the most holding bait for trout.” — Cotton. OF PASTES FOR BAIT. Pastes are considered of much importance in England, in taking carp, chub, dace, perch, and trout. Some of them have been tried with success in many of our own brooks and ponds. The following will tax the Angler’s ingenuity, and a trial in many cases more than compensate him for liis trouble. 40 BAITS. Salmon Roe. Barker, author of a work on angling, was the first to discover this most tempting bait. In a letter to a “ noble lord,” he says: “ I have an experience of late which you may angle with, and take great store of this kind of fish. First, it is the best bait that I have seen in all my time ; and will take great store, and not fail, if they be there. Secondly, it is a special bait for dace, or dare, good for chub, orbottlin, or grayling. The bait is the roe of a salmon or trout ;* if' it be a large trout, that the spawns be any thing great, you must angle for the trout with this as you angle with the brandling, taking a pair of scissors, and cut as much as a large hazel nut, and bait your hook, so fall to your sport; there is no doubt of pleasure. If I had known it but twenty years ago, I would have gained a hundred pounds only with that bait. I am bound in duty to divulge it to your honor, and not carry it to my grave with me. I do desire that men of quality should have it that delight in that pleasure. The greedy Angler will murmur at me, but for that I care not.” Blaine gives the following most approved method of pre- serving this spawn. “ A pound of spawn is immersed in water, as hot as the hands can bear it, and is then picked from membranous films, &c. It is now to be rinsed with cold water, and hung up to drain for 24 hours ; after which, put to it two ounces of rock or bay salt, and a quarter of an ounce of salt-petre, and again hang it up for 24 hours more. Now spread it on a dish, and gently dry it before the fire or in the sun, and when it be- comes stiff, pot it down. We should, however, recommend that the potting be rot in one mass, but that it be divided in small pots, pouring over each some melted suet, by which method a part can be opened when wanted, instead of dis * A late writer in the “ Spirit of the Times,” says ho has used this bait for trout, in the vicinity of the White Mountains, New-Humpshire, and found it a most killing bait. BAITS. 41 turbing the general store. It forms an additional security to cover each over with a moistened skin or bladder. To bait, first put on the hook (which should be sized according to the fish intended to be tried for) a mass which shall fill up the hollow of the bend and hide the steel. On the point, put two or more firm large grains, both to conceal the snare and tempt the fish.” Shrimp Paste is used by some Anglers for perch, and is prepared and used in a similar manner to the salmon roe paste. Cheese Paste is a favorite with some Anglers. It is made of either old or new cheese, grated, and worked into a paste with a little butter and saffron, and also with stale bread if the cheese be new, and new bread if the cheese be stale. Sweet Paste , is made by mixing a proportion of bread and honey together, until they become thoroughly incorporated, and of sufficient tenacity to remain well on the hook. When, honey cannot be procured, white sugar, made into a syrup, or molasses, will be found equally good. Bread Paste. The following simple method is recom- mended by Hoffand. Take the inside of a French roll, or a piece of fine white bread, nearly new, soak it a few seconds in water, then squeeze from it with very clean hands , knead it, and work it patiently till it becomes a perfect, smooth, and compact paste. Pastes are sometimes colored, to give them the appearance of fish spawn. For this purpose, to give a yellow color, use saffron or turmeric, and for a reddish, vermillion or red lead. Wheat, Rye , Barley , and other grains, aud Malt , are also used for taking small fish of various kinds, in 6till water. They should be soaked in water, or boiled in milk, until soft. The Angler will find them useful in taking minnows, shiners, spearing, and other small fry for bait. Graves or Tallow-Chandlers' Scratchings. Tho latest BAITS. <2 English writers on angling highly approve of this bait for barbel, roach, dace, chub, and eels. As it can be easily procured, and may prove a good bait for some varieties of our own fish, we conclude our Chapter on Baits, by giving Blaine and Holland’s manner of preparing it. Blaine says : “ To prepare them, break a sufficient quantity, over which first pour some cold water, and let it stand by all night : in the next morning, pour oft' the cold, and in lieu of it pour some warm, but not very hot water; after this has stood an hour or two, the parts of the greaves will separate, from which choose as baits the largest, whitest, and most connect- ed pieces, which cover with leaves, or wrap in a moist cloth for use. When fishing, hang one, two, or three of the whitest pieces on the hook, concealing the point.” Holland says: ” They must be chopped into small pieces, placed in an earthen pan, and boiling water poured on them till covered, when in one hour, the slimy particles will have softened and separated, and become fit for use : when mixed with clay and bran, they form an excellent ground bait. Graves should be newly scalded for every day’s fishing, for if stale, they do more barm than good.” The following beautiful lines by Cotton, the celebrated Angler, and friend of Walton, may serve to remind their dis- ciples of many requisites for success, which put in plain prose might possibly be forgotten. Away to the brook, All your tackle out-look, Here’s a day that is worth a yenr’s wishing, See that all things be right, For ’twould be a spite To want tools when a man goes a-fishing. BAITS 43 Your rod with tops two, For the samo will not do, If your manner of angling you vary ; And full well may you think, If you troll with a pink, One too weak may be apt to miscarry. Then busket, neat made By a master in's trade, In a bolt at your shoulders must dangle ; For none e’er was so vain To wear this to disdain Who a true brother was of the angle. Next pouch must not fail, StufPd as full as a mail, With wax, crewels, silks, hairs, furs, and feathers, To make several flies, For the several skies, That shall kill in despite of all weathers. Tho boxes and books For your linos and your hooks ; And, though not for strict need notwithstanding, Your scissors and hone To adjust your points on, With a net to bo sure of your landing. All thoso being on, ’Tis high time wo woro gono, Down and upwurd, tlmt all may have pleasure, Till, here mooting at night, We shall havo the delight To discourse of our fortuues at leisure. Tho day 's not too bright, And the wind hits us right And all nature does seem to invito us ; Wo havo all things at will For to second our skill, As they all did couspiro to dolight us. On stream now, or still, A large pannier we’ll fill, Trout and Grayling to rise are so willing; I dure venture to say, ’Twill be a bloody day, And we all shall be weary of killiug. Away, then, away, We lose sport by delay; But first leave our sorrow behind use If Miss Fortune should come, Wc arc all gone from home, And a-fishing she never can find us. The Angler is free From the cares that degree Finds itself with, so often, tormented ; And although we should slay Each a hundred a-day, ’Tis a slaughter needs ne’er be repented. And although wo display All our arts to betray What were mnde for man’s pleasure and diet. Yet both princes and states May for all our quaint baits, Rule themselves and their pcoplo in quiet. We scratch not our pates, Nor repine at the rates Our superiors impose on our living; But do frankly submit, Knowing they have more wit, In demanding than we have in giving. While quiet wo sit, We conclude all things fit, Acquiescing with hearty submission : For, though simple, wo know That soft murmurs will grow At the last, unto downright sedition. BAITS. 45 Wo care not who says, And intends it dispruisc, That an angler to a fool is next neighbor: L^t him prate — what care we ? We’re os honest as he ; And so let him take that for his labor. We covet no wealth, But the blessing of lienlth, And that greater good conscience within os. Such devotion we bring To our God and our King, That from either no offers can win us. While we sit and fish, We pray as wo wish For long life to our King, James the Second: Honest anglers then may, Or they ’ve very foul play, With the bost of good subjects be reckon’d. Having commenced with the Rod, and finally wormed through all the articles necessary to the equipment of the complete Angler, it will be proper in our next chapter, to make some observations on the practice of angling. CHAPTER III. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PRACTICE OP ANGLING. For Angling may bo said to bo liko the Mathematics, that it can never be fully Ioarncd ; at least not so fully but that there will be still more experimenting left for the trial of other men.” Walton. Angling generally, in this country, is not necessarily so sci- entific as in many parts of Europe. Our streams being larger, more numerous, and less fished, except in a few instances near our large cities, heavier tackle in some cases may be used, and less skill required. In angling for trout in the country streams, where immense quantities are found, the less skilful augler, with coarse tackle, will often succeed in filling his basket in a very short time. But as railroads in- crease, and access becomes more easy to the different fishing grounds, the fish will become more shy, greater skill bo re- quired, and finer tackle indispensable, to complete success. Hence where a worm for trout, a piece of bread for perch, or a strip of pork for pickerell, have been used, natural or arti- ficial flies, and small fish, attached to the finest possible kind of materials, will be needed. Therefore the true Angler should make himself thoroughly acquainted with the most approved modes of Angling, and the best materials for his proper equipment 47 OB THE PRACTICE OP ANGLING. The Artificial Fly, so much used in England, finds but little favor in this country, not because it is not as good a bait but because more skill is required in using it , cons equen y many of our Anglers only fish in the spring months, when the water is thick and turbid, and the worm call be used, white the more experienced sportsman from foreign parts, will astonish the native by his dexterity in throwing the fly and kill- ing an almost incredible number of fish, where the unbehev regarded the fly as a useless article of tackle. There are some that attain to greater proficiency in fly-fishing than others, as is the case with almost any kind of sport. But the dull necessary to success in this branch of our subject, is not so great as the novice imagines : certainly it is the more gen- teel, as well as the most pleasant mode, as those who have successfully tried it can testify. It is therefore to be hoped it will be more generally adopted by All who seek the lake or brook, With rod aud line, and float and hook. Great improvements have been made within a few years in the manufacture of artificial baits. Every variety ot fish and insect lias been most successfully imitated, defying almost the scrutiny of the Angler, and certainly the object of his sport. These improvements every brother of the ting e should adopt, and thereby remove the objections ot the few who oppose the art on Bacon and Byronic grounds.t As the enjoyment of angling naturally makes the sports- man a keen observer, he should pay particular attention to the winds, those * Parties arc often made up in England for fishing in the Canadas and the United States. ... t llyrou and Bacon both objectod to angling on account of the neces- sity which iheu existed of using various live animals on the hook as baits. 48 ON THE PRACTICSOF ANGLING. “ Unaoon currents of the air, aa Bryant has it. Walton says: “You are to take notice, that of the winds, the south wind is said to bo the best. One ob- serves, that 4 When the wind is in tho south, It blows tho bait in the fish's mouth.* Next to that, the west wind is believed to bo the best ; and having told you that the east wind is the worst, I need not tell which wind is the worst in the third degree : and yet (as Solomon observes) 1 that he that considers the wind shall never sow,’ so he that busies his head too much about them, if the weather be not made extreme cold by an east wind, shall be a little superstitious ; for as it is observed by some that there is no good horse of a bad color, so I have observed that if it be a cloudy day, and not extreme cold, let the wind set in what quarter it will, and do its worst, I heed it not, and yet take this for a rule, that I would willingly fish standing on the lee shore ; and you are to take notice that the fish lies or swims nearer the bottom, and in deeper water than in sum- mer ; and also nearer the bottom in a cold day, and then gets nearest the lee side of the water. Sir Humphrey Davy says : “ For fly-fishing, A duy with not too bright a beam, A warm but not a scorching sun. Also, “ never fish with your back to the sun, as your shadow is thrown on the water, and the fish are frightened at your movements.” These are important instructions to the Angler, and the high source from whence they come should be con- sidered by him as law. It would be well to notice here, also, that after protracted rains or severe storms, the Angler should fish at the bottom if he expect sport, and that it is use- ON THE PRACTICE OP ANGLING. 49 less to angle after a long drought in summer, or in the autumn or spring, when the high east, or cold north winds blow. In fresh water angling the best time is early in the morn- ing, or at the close of the day. The proper time for salt water angling depends upon the tide. The best time is at the last of the ebb or the first of the flood, whether at morn- ing, at mid-day, or at night. In all kinds of angling it is necessary to be very cautions, but particularly in taking the wily trout. Many novices in the art wander up and down streams, and wade creeks, with little or no success, from the want of this — a proper requisite of every good angler. Tire more skilful, also, sometimes fail from the same fault. A story is told, which serves well to show the necessity of caution. An Angler, who had risen with the sun, and fished till near noon-day without success, was outdone by a knowing one, who, with proper precaution, passed his rod and line between the legs of the Angler (which like his line were pretty well stretched) into a hole underneath the bank. He soon had a bite, and succeeded in taking a two pound trout, almost before the astonished tyro was aware of his presence. Some are of opinion that trout, and similar fish, can hear* the tread on the ground. It is certain that it will start at the least noise, when nothing can be seen. Salter, in his “ Angler’s Guide,” says: “ Keep as far from the water as you can, and go quietly and slily to work, for fish have so many enemies that they are suspicious of every thing they see, feel, or hear ; even the shaking the bank of a river (un- * Smith, in his “ History of the Fishes of Massachusetts,” says that the acoustic apparatus is boxed up in the solid bones of the skull, so that sound propagated through the water, gives a vibratory motion or tremor to the whole body, and which, agitating the auditory nerve, produces hearing. 50 ON THE PRACTICE OF ANGLING. der which they frequently lie) will alarm them, and spoil the Angler’s sport, &c. ; and also, when two or three anglers are fishing near each other ; therefore avoid agitating the water by trampling on the bank unnecessarily ; drop your baited book in the water gently, and you will kill more fish than three Anglers who act differently.” Blaine also says: “ Avoid every thing that may attract the attention of the fish : stand so far from the water’s edge as you can, and never let your shadow fall on the water. If possible, take the advantage of a bush, tree, &c., completely to conceal the person. When an Angler fishes near home, an artificial screen of rushes, twigs, &c., may be employed for that purpose. In dropping or dipping with the natural fly, the greatest caution is necessary to keep completely out of view of the fish ; not only the shadow of the person, but that of the rod also, should be kept from falling on the water.” The dress of the Angler is of great importance in trout angling. If it be true, as before stated, that this timid inha- bitant of the brook is disturbed by the least motion, certainly the best means should be taken to render any motion imper- ceptible. There are two colors of dress for angling, desirable on different occasions. If your sport'be in the summer, and lie mid the brilliant green foliage of the trees, bushes, and mead- ows, your dress should undoubtedly be green throughout. On the contrary, should you be pleased to enjoy yourself in au- tumn, when nature has changed the scene, and draped herself in sober brown, the most proper uniform is a drab from top to toe. A disciple of Walton, who angles on Long-Island, and takes more trout than any ten sportsmen who visit that delight- ful resort, is represented as standing as still as a ghost, his rod extended in his hand, without any apparent motion, eqtiipped in drab pantaloons, drab vest, drab coat, and drab hat; and so quiet is he in his movements, that he will take a mess of trout, when a person but a few yards distant would hardly bo ON THE PRACTICE OF ANGLING. 51 aware that he moved a muscle. How different from many who profess to understand the art, and who go whipping and splashing the water for miles around. As health is of great importance, the lover of this sport should adopt the physician’s prescription, and “ keep the head cool and the feet warm.” To this end he should pro- vide himself with a pair of water-proof boots, to be ready should he wish to wade the stream, or cross a marsh. He should also pay strict attention to all laws regarding angling, and all rules laid down For bridge, boat, or brook fishing, and on no account transgress the laws of the different States with respect to spawning time, and the size of the fish to be taken. It is much to be regretted, that there are many who call themselves anglers, who set all laws at defiance, by taking many kinds of fish out of season ; such conduct is unworthy a sportsman, and should meet with rebuke from every member of the angling community. Finally, let the disciple of the rod “ Uso all gently,” and when he has made up his mind to pass a few days, or even hours, in this delightful amusement, let him be fully prepared with everything necessary , and everything in order. CHAPTER IV. THE S ALM ON. This noble fish was known to the world a3 early as the days of the Romans. Pliny speaks of them as being in the rivers of Aquitaine. They are found at the present day in the waters of Prance, England, Ireland and Scotland, and on this continent as far north as Greenland. They are found in the greatest abundance in Ireland and Scotland. In some of tho rivers of the latter country, large rents are paid for these fisheries. In England and Wales, at certain seasons, they have been taken by thousands in a day, and on some occa- sions in such abundance that they have been fed to the swine. “ In Scotland, they have been so plenty, that the farmer’s servants have stipulated to have them but twice a week for food!” Smith, in his “ History of the Fishes of Massachusetts,” relates the following : “ Captain Charles Kendall, a respect- able and intelligent navigator of Boston, assured us, that when on the northwest coast of America, within a few years, he stood in a small stream that came leaping down the crags of a mountain, in which these delightful fishes were urging their way in such astonishing crowds, with hardly water enough to cover their backs, that ho stood with an axe and killed hundreds of them as they passed between his feet. He saw birds of prey dive down from the long branches of trees THE SALMON. 53 *hat waved over the falls, and pick out the eyes of several at a time, before they flew back to their resting-places.” The Salmon formerly frequented the Hudson* and Con- necticut, but the steamboat navigation on these beautiful rivers, have interfered with their passage, and by increasing interruption, they have been driven farther north, and like the aboriginal inhabitants of our land, seem destined to find a resting-place far beyond the home of their fathers. The Kennebec, the St. Lawrence, the waters of the upper Mis- souri, the Ohio, and many of our western lakes, now furnish largo quantities, equal in beauty and flavor to those of any part of the world. They leap up the falls of many of these livers with astonishing and almost incredible velocity, sur- mounting obstacles of great magnitude by the extraordinary muscular power of their tail. Michael Drayton, an English miter, speaks of their summersault, or leap, in the following lines : ■ 41 As when the salmon seeks a fresher stream to find, (Which hither from the sea comes yearly by his kind,) As lie towards season grows : and stems the watery tract Where Tivy, falling down, makes a high cataract, Forced by the rising rocks that thero her course oppose, As though within her bounds they meant her to enclose; Here, when the laboring fish docs at the foot arrive, And finds that by his strength ho docs but vainly strive ; His tail takes in his mouth, and bending like a bow That’s to full compass drawn, aloft himself doth throw, Then springing at his height, os doth a little wand, That bended end to end, and started from mail’s baud For off itself doth cast; so does the salmon vault; And if at first he fail, his second summersault He instantly essays, nnd from his nimblo ring Still yerking, never leaves until himself ho fling Above the opposing stream.” * A number were taken in netts, in the Bay of New-York, in the month of June, 1844. 54 THE SALMON. Like the trout, they are very timid; and if, at the time of their advent, they are suddenly frightened by any noiso, or splasliing of the water, will turn and swim in a contrary direc- tion at a surprising rate of velocity. It has been ascertained by calculation, that they can move at the rate of 30 miles an hour. They run up the rivers from the sea, to deposit their spawn, from April to July, and arc at this time in fine condi- tion for the table ; after which they return again to the sea. They are much troubled with what fishermen call the salmon- louse, and are known in some instances to return to the fresh water in the months of September and October, to rid them- selves of these annoying insects. Smith says : “ The young are about two inches in length when they visit the sea for tho first time. After the parent fish have passed up the rivers, the spring following, the young ones follow at a respectable distance, having grown about six inches. At the end of two years, they weigh five, six, and seven pounds; at the end of six years, they have attained their ordinary dimensions.” An English writer, called the 11 North Country Angler,” says: “ The roe of the salmon becomes salmon fry in March and April, and they very soon find their way to the sea, where they grow with amazing rapidity ; as on their return to their native streams in June or July of the same year, they weigh six or seven pounds. They are usually called grilse until they weigh about nine pounds, after which they are called salmon/’ The following account of late experiments on salmon in Scotland, taken from tho “ Kelso Mail,” a Scotch paper, rather contradicts the opinions of former writers on the rapid increase in size of this species of fish. “ In the month of April, 1843, Mr. James ICeras, a gaine-keeper at Bowhill, Selkirkshire, took from tho Ettriek, and marked from six to seven dozen of the salmon fry going down to the sea, by in- serting a piece of wire through the tail of each, and twisting THE SALMON. 55 it at both ends. In the last week of July last, ( 1844,) a grilse of from five to six pounds weight, was caught at the shore- side fishery near Berwick, by James M’Queen, fisherman, and in the tail was a piece of wire twisted at both ends, as described. M’Queen did not preserve the wire, but is satis- fied in his own mind that it was brass, and of the description inserted m the fry by Mr. Keras. There can therefore scarcely be a doubt that it was one of the fry marked by the latter, and pro\*es to a demonstration, that the fry occupy a much longer period in arriving at a state of maturity than has been generally supposed.” This extraordinary fish grows to a very large size. Hof- land says, the largest ever heard of in England was sold in the London market, and weighed 83 pounds. This may be true: but it reminds us of the story of the crabs. A foreigner in Great Britain, conversing with one of the sons of that island, (where every thing is better, larger, and greater than in any other part of creation,) jocularly remarked, that in his country, he had seen crabs that weighed 500 pounds each. “ Impossible,” retorted Johnny Bull, in his characteristic style, “ we have as large crabs in our country as in any other, and I never saw one that weighed over 150 pounds ” ! ! Still, Hofland may be correct ; but there are many Brother Jona- thans that will think of the crab story, and rather doubt the authenticity of the 83 pound salmon. In this country, the largest ever known weighed about 40 pounds, which must have been a fry compared with that “ sold at the London market.” The common length of tho salmon is from two to three and a half feet, except when of the extraordinary English weight mentioned, when they would probably measure five or six feet. They are of a beautiful silver gray color, running into white on the belly and blue on the back, and are marked with numerous irregular dark and copper colored spots. The male is gener 56 THE SALMON’. ally of a larger and more slender shape than the female, with a slight difference in the shape and color of the spots. The upper jaw is larger than the lower, and in the males the under jaw is curved upward. Considered as a whole, he may be called the most extraordinary and most beautiful fish in the world ; and whether we admire him as leaping the cataract, fresh floored from his native element on the green carpet of the meadow, or in smoking anticipation as a viand on the table, he well deserves the appellation of king of the watery course, or, as Willis in his quaint way would proba- bly call him, the prince of fish-dom. The sport in taking him is of the most exciting kind, re- quiring the utmost skill of the truly scientific Angler. Sir Walter Scott says : “ Salmon fishing is to all other kinds of angling, as buck shooting to shooting of any meaner descrip- tion. The salmon is in this particular the king of fish. It requires a dexterous hand and an accurate eye to raise and strike him ; and when this is achieved, the sport is only be- guu where, even in trout angling, unless in case of an unusually lively and strong fish, it is at once commenced and ended. Indeed the most sprightly trout that ever was hooked, shows mere child’s play in comparison to afresh run-salmon. There is all the difference which exists between coursing the hare and running the fox. The pleasure and suspense are of twenty times the duration — the address and strength required infinitely greater — the prize when attained, not only more honorable but more valuable. The hazards of failure are also an hundred-fold multiplied ; the instinct of the salmon leads to the most singular efforts to escape, which must be met and foiled by equal promptitude on the part of the angler ” They love to haunt the rapid rivers or large lakes, with sandy or pebbly bottoms, that run into the sea, and are usually, when on the feed, found in the roughest and boldest parts. They will best take the bait early in the morning or late in THE SALMON. 57 the afternoon, when there is a light breeze on the water. When not on feed they retreat to deep water, and also under banks, bushes, &c. The best time for angling for them is from May until August. In July and August they will often take the fly freely ; for the months of May and June, worms, shrimp, or small fish, will be found the best baits. Bait-fishing for Salmon is generally practised with a rod of from sixteen to eighteen feet in length, with a hollow butt and spare tops, either for worm or minnow fishing. Some sportsmen prefer a lighter top for worm fishing than for spin- ning the minnow ; the hollow butt allows him to use his taste, ami also the advantage of extra tops against breakage. There are two ways of rigging the rod for the line — the old- fashioned plan of rings, whipped on with thread, is preferred by some, and the patent guide, a solid stationary ring, (a new invention) by others. Attached to the rod should be a multi- plying reel, capable of holding from three to six hundred feet of line ; to insure success with large game, the largest sized reel, with six hundred feet of line, should be used. The line adapted to the reel should be either of silk, hair, silk and hair, or grass. The two former descriptions are most in use, but the latter is now preferred by many on account of its strength, durability, and lightness. Affixed to the line should be a swivel sinker, and a leader, either of single or twisted gut, of from three to six feet in length, according to the depth of water. For middle fishing, use a large size float of cork or red cedar. The proper size of hook should be No. 0, 1,2, 3, of the Kirby or Limerick pattern, attached to single or twisted gut. A very few Anglers use gimp instead of gut, but the show it makes in the water, both from its size and color, pre- clude the idea of mnch success. From the timid nature of the object of your sport, your tackle should combine strength with imperccptibilitv. For Fly-Fishing for Salmon, the customary rod used is 58 THE SALMON. from sixteen to twenty feet long, with a gradual taper, and uniform from the end of the first or butt joint to the end of the top, which latter should be of the most elastic substance, and brought almost to a point : in fact the proper form of a fly rod, is a perfectly whip taper. The rings should be of the lightest kind, and wound on with thread or silk, and the whole apparatus as light as the necessary strength will allow. In some instances they are provided with a spike or spear, which screws into the butt, and which is found very useful to the Angler on many occasions, for sticking the rod in an upright position, for the purpose of altering or arranging the line or other tackle. The same arrangement of tackle is re- quired for the fly rod as for the bait rod, with tho exception of substituting a swivel and small shot, instead of a swivel sinker. Worm fishing for Salmon. For worm bait, usea Salmon Limerick honk, from No. 0 to 4, as the size of tho game may indiente. Attach the worms according to the method de- scribed in Chapter II. j throw them gently in the current; let them flow easily down a few yards ; then draw them back ; then to the right and left ; keeping up a continual motion of the bait. By this method, if you are cautious, and keep out of sight— and if there be fish, as Walton would say —you will be sure to have your share of good luck. In bright clear weather, a hook of either No. 3, 4, or 5, will be large enough. It will also be necessary, if the stream be clear, on some occasions to use only one large worm. When the bail is taken, the premonitory symptoms are a distended line, and sometimes a sudden jerk. In cither case keep a tight line .* the former admonition generally promises success, and when it is well understood, will give the most pleasure. After allowing a short time for gorging, you should give a sharp strike, and if done with precision, and not too THE SALMON. 59 violent, you will rarely fail to hook your fish. On the con- trary, the sudden jerk is seldom more or less than a nibble; you should therefore give a moderate pull, which will rather excite your game, and iuduce him to call again for worms'. The following practical information, taken from “ Fisher’s Angler’s Souvenir,” will give the reader some idea of the maimer of taking a large fish, after he is hooked ; for as it is one thing to catch a fish and another to cook it, so it is one thing to hook a fish and another thing to take him after you get him on. “ J udging from his pull, you estimate his weight at 30 pounds, the largest and strongest, you verily believe, you ever have hooked. With that headlong plunge, as if he meant to bury his head in the gravelly bottom, he has hooked himself. Your hook, which will hold 30 pounds dead weight, is buried in his jaws to the bend, and now that he feels the barb, he shoots up the stream with the swiftness of an arrow, and fifty yards of your line are nm off before you dare ven- ture to check him. Now his speed is somewhat diminished, hold on a little, and as the river side is clear of trees, follow up after him, for it is bad policy to let out line to an unman- ageable length, when you can follow your fish. There are 6ome awkward rocks towards the head of the pool, which may cut your line ; turn him, therefore, as soon as you can. Now is the time to show your tact, in putting your tackle to test, without having it snapped by a sudden spring. Hold gently— ease oft’ a little — now hold again — how beautifully the rod bonds, true from top to butt, in one uniform curve ! He has a mouth, though bitted for the first time! Bravo! his nose is down the water! Lead him along — gently, he grows restive, and is about again. Though his course is still up the stream, he seems inclined to tack. Now he shoots from bank to bank, like a Berwick smack turning up Sea Beach in a gale of wind. Watch him well in stays, lest he shoot suddenly ahead, and carry all away. He is nearing the 60 THE SALMON. rocks give him the butt and turn him again. He comes round he cannot bear that steady pull — what excellent tackle ! lead him downwards— he follows reluctantly, but he is beginning to fag. Keep winding up your line as you lead him along. He is inclined to take a rest at the bottom, but as you hope to land him, do not grant him a moment. Throw in a large stone at him, but have both your eyes open — one on your rod, and the other on the place where the fish lies — lest he make a rush when you are stooping for a stone, and break loose. Great, at this moment, is the advantage of the angler who has a ‘cast ’ in his eye ! That stone has startled the fish no rest for salmo— and now he darts to the surface. * yP w * tail y • ’ what a leap ! it is well you humored him by dipping the top of your rod, or he would have gone free. Again and again ! these are the last efforts of despair, and they have exhausted him. He is seized with stupor, like a stout gentleman who has suddenly exerted himself after dinner, or a boxer who has just received a swinging blow on the jugular. Draw him towards the shore, he can scarcely move a fin. Quick, the gaff is in his gills, and now you have him out ; and as he lies stretched on the pebbles, with his silver sides glancing in the sun, you think that you never caught a handsomer fish in your life, though you perceive that you have been wrong in your estimate of his weight- thirty pounds — for it is evident that he does not weigh more than thirteen. It was exactly half-past seven when you hooked him, and when you look at your watch after landing him, you perceive that it wants a quarter to nine, so that he Has kept you in exercise exactly an hour and a quarter." Artificial Flies for Salmon Fishing. The flies used in this country for taking salmon, do not differ materially from those used in England, Ireland, or Scotland. In the fly sea- son, those of the most gaudy description are generally used. THE SALMON • 61 Tho most approved are made of the choice feathers of the peacock, pheasant, parrot, partridge, woodcock, ostrich, ma- caw, turkey, guinea-hen, &c., with bright colored bodies, and gold twist. They can be procured ready made, and of all descriptions, at the general tackle.stores. The following list, used in Ireland, Scotland, and Wales, and to some extent in the United States, may be found useful to the Angler. No. 1. Body of the fly half dark blue and half orange mohair, ribbed with silver twist and red tip ; legs of black hackle, wings of the grey mottled feather of the wing of the mallard. No. 2. The body half blue and half light green, or greenish yellow, with a gold rib and red twist, black hackle legs, and wings from the heron's wing. No. 3. Body, light green mohair, ribbed with gold twist; tips, orange mohair and turkey’s wing ; legs black hackle ; wings of the black and white tail feathers of the turkey. No. 4 . Body of orange colored silk or worsted, with gold twist ; dun hackle legs ; wings dark brown motdod feather | of the bittern. No. 5. Wings of the speckled feather of the mallard’s wing; body of blue mohair, with silver twist, with a dark I blue hackle for legs. No. 6. Body, claret and orange colored mohair, with green lip and gold twist ; wings of the turkey feather, with white tips ; legs black and red hackle. No. 7. Body of yellow silk or mohair, with gold twist; wings of the brown mottled feather of the turkey ; dark red hackle for legs. No. 8. Wings of tho woodcock or partridge, body purple mohair, legs coch-a-bonddu hackle. No 9 Wings light speckled feather of the wing of the mallard; body yellow silk with fine gold twist; tail three strands of red hackle, and legs ot the same. 62 THE SALMON. No. 10. Body black ostrich , with silver twist ; wings from the mallard’s wing, and black hackle for legs. There are other varieties of flies, both of English and American manufacture, used in the United States and Canada, which can generally be procured at the tackle stores in the city of New- York. Salmon Spearing. This is a mode of taking fish not ap- proved of by the regular sportsman. It is practised to a great extent on many of our western lakes and rivers, usually by persons who take fish for a livelihood, and where they are found in such immense quantities, that there can be no objection to the plan, as it is an active and invigor* ating pastime, almost equal to that of hunting. It is generally practised at night, with torches, and gives many an hour of evening sport, after a day’s business, to the inhabitants in tho vicinity of the lakes where they are found. The Indians, who in their rude manner surpass many of their more civilized brethren in water or land sports, are very fond of this amuse* ment. and in the season can be seen traversing the lakes in their canoes, with varied and brilliant pine lights, presenting a most beautiful and picturesque appearance. There is a law of the State of New-York, prohibiting the taking of salmon by net, hook, or spear, “ or any other device whatsoever,” in the months of October and November, but which, like many of our State laws, is better known by its breach than its observance. How to cook a Salmon. The following method of cooking and crimping a salmon, given by Sir Humphrey Davy, will be found useful after he has been taken; and as the reader has been led through the instructions of taking the game, con- cluding that the fish is taken, directions for cooking will be here in place. THE SALMON. 63 “ He seems fairly tired, I shall bring him into shore. Now gaff him ; strike as near the tail as you can. He is safe ; we must prepare him for tlio pot. Give him a stunning blow on the head, to deprive him of sensation ; and then give him a transverse cut, just below the gills and crimp him, by cutting, so as almost to divide him into slices, and hold him by the tail that he may bleed. There is a small spring I see, close under that bank, which I dare say has the mean temperature of the atmosphere in this climate, and is much under fifty de- grees ; place him there, and let him remain ten minutes, and then carry him to the pot and let the water and salt boil furi- ously, before you put in a slice ; and give time for the water to recover its heat before you put in another ; leave the head out, and throw in the thickest pieces first ” CHAPTER V. OF THE SALMON TROUT, LAKE TROUT, OR LAKE SALMON. Owing to the unexplored condition of the fish kingdom in this country, as stated in preceding pages of this work, little can be said of the true character of this fish. They are simi- lar in appearance and habits to the salmon, so that a descrip- tion of the one is a description of the other. They are found in large quantities in most of our northern lakes. Their usual length is from two to four foet, but in the large lakes of Michi- gan, Huron, and Ontario, they are often taken of five, and even six feet hi length, and in some cases have been known to weigh as much as 120 pounds, which is rather a stumper to Johnny Bull’s salmon of 83 pounds. They do not grow to a large size in England, their usual weight being from two to seven pounds, though in some instances they have been taken of the weight of 17 pounds. Although a fine fish for the table, they are not considered by the epicure as bearing any comparison to the salmon pure in flavor. They aro taken in a similar manner and with the same arrangements of tackle as the salmon ; with the fly, worm, or small fish for bait. The most common mode, however, is with a common drop line, in sixty feet water, which is not so scientific or pleasant a mode, but takes the largest fish, and gives satis- THE SALMON TROUT, & C . 65 faction to the market fisherman, and those of the angling com- munity who are fond of sea fishing, and that use not the rod. Another pleasant mode of taking this game is by trolling in a skiff, punt, row, or sail boat. The best of these modes is in a skiff or light row boat, with a stiff rod and strong tackle, and a reel containing from 100 to 200 yards of line. A friend who fishes in the western lakes, says ho has very good sport in trolling with a fly and small fish, attached to a long gut lender — the fly and fish being about one yard apart. Tho Angler is referred for trolling, to another part of this work, containing a minute and graphic account, by an old and experienced sportsman, for trolling for black bass, which method will be attended with equal success in trolling for salmon tr out or salmon. CHAPTER Vl. OP THE TROUT. This beautiful and well known fish inhabits the waters of almost all countries on the globe. In England, Ireland, Scot- land, Germany, and Prussia, it is sought for by the angler and the epicure as the height of their admiration. Our own coun- try, with its countless streams and lakes, furnishes quantities equal to all the rest combined ; and although they have been much sought after within a fow years back, still there are many streams where the line never floated, or the trout ever had the satisfaction of being tempted by the angler’s scientific art. They vary greatly in size, color and description, accord- ing to the climate, the nature of the water, or the quality of their feed. They go under the different names of common or silver trout, black trout, sea trout, and bass. The Silver Trout, or common trout, is found in almost all of our clear swift running northern streams, and weigh from one to 15 pounds. A splendid specimen of this species of trout is taken in Bashe’s Kill, Sullivan County, New-York, said to sur- pass any thing of the kind in the world. This stream winds along the western side of Shawangunk mountain, through the beauti- ful and well cultivated valley of Memekating, has a smooth gravelly bottom, and so remarkably clear and transparent it, that the smallest insect is perceptible on its bed. THE TROUT. 67 Common Trout , * ( Salmo Fontinalus — Mitckill ,) “ with yellow and red spots on botli sides of the lateral line, concave tail, and sides of the belly orango red ; back mottled pale and brown, sides dark brown with yellow and red spots, the yeL low larger than the red surrounding them ; the latter appear like scarlet dots ; lateral line straight, the yellow spots and red dots both above and below that line ; lowest part of the ab- domen whitish with a smutty tinge ; first rays of the pectoral ventral and anal fins white, the second black, the rest pur- plish red ; dorsal fin mottled of a yellowish and black ; tail is rather concave, but not amounting to a fork, and of a reddish purple, with blackish spots above and below ; eyes large and pale, mouth wide, teeth sharp, tongue distinct, 6kin scaleless. Is reckoned a most dainty fish. He lives in running waters only,t and not in stagnant ponds; and therefore the lively streams, descending north and south from their sources on Long Island, exactly suit the constitution of this fish. The heaviest Long Island trout that I have heard of weighed four pounds and a half." “The common trout of Massachusetts! is from 8 to 12 inches long, dotted on tho back with brownish spots, shaded by a paler circle. On the gill-covers is a broad spot ; the un- der jaw is the longest ; the soft rayed fins tiuged with yellow, and on the sides of the body are red spots.” The Black Trout is usually found in muddy sluggish streams or large ponds, with clay bottoms, in the roughest and wildest parts of our country. They are not considered as * The trout of Long Island. t This is not always the case. They aro taken in great quantities at Stump Pond, Long Island, of a large size, but not of as fine u fiuvor and color as in swift running waters. They nro also found in various other ponds throughout the country, and are often transferred to artificial ponds supplied from springe. X Smith. J 68 THE TROUT. game a fish as the ordinary trout, neither do they possess as fine a flavor for the table. They are supposed to take their color from the quality and color of the water, which has gene- rally a dark smoky appearance, occasioned by the decayed leaves and timber which there abound. Many of the streams in the western and mountainous parts of Pennsylvania, contain this speoies. They are found also in great abundance, in the wild and uninhabited parts of Hamilton county, New-York, and in some parts of New-Hampshire and Vermont. Of the Sea Trout , the writer is enabled to give a better and more satisfactory description than his own. Smith says: “ They are found, as may be inferred from the name, in the salt and brackish waters of tide rivers, inland bays in various parts of this* and the adjoining states. When taken from the 6alt water early in the spring, they are in high perfection, and nothing can exceed their piscatory symmetry. The general ap- pearance of the skin is of a silvery brightness; the back being of a greenish and mackerel complexion, the spots of a vermil- ion color, mixed with others of a faint yellow, aud sometimes slightly tinged with purple, extend the whole length on each aide of the lateral line ; the fins are light in color and firm in texture, and together with the tail are rather shorter and more rounded than the common trout. They have a firm compact- ness of form from head to tail, which accounts for the superior sprightliness of their motion ; tho head and mouth are very small, and the latter never black inside like the common, or fresh water trout ; tho flesh is even redder, or rather we would say, more pink colored than the salmon, to which, by many, they are preferred as a delicacy, having, like the salmon, much of what is called the curd or fat between the flakes. “ A fish of a pound weight measures about 1 1 inches in length. Their average size is considerably larger than tho fresh water, or brook trout — having been taken in the waters to " Massachusetts. L THE TROUT. k 69 which we refer* of nearly five pounds weight ; such instances, however, are rare, three pounds being considered a very large fish. We do not remember ever seeing a poor fish of this kind taken ; they are invariably in good condition, let the size be what it will ; their principal food is the minnow and shrimp, particularly the latter, with which early in the .season their stomachs are found to be filled ; they feed upon the minnow rather later in the season, when the inc^g using warmth of the water invites it to leave the warmer springs of fresh water, where it has passed the winter, and venture into the shallows round the margin of the bay, it then becomes an easy prey to the voracious trout, which pursues it with desperate boldness to the very feet of the angler as he stands in the water, obli- ging it in shoals, to leap from the surface, and sometimes even to be cast on shore in its attempts to escape its hungry jaws. Though they are, on the whole, the best bait ; the shrimp on the contrary, living as they do among the eel-grass in the bay, which also affords shelter to the trout, being more within reach, may consequently be said to supply their principal food, at least through the winter months. As it is necessary in the pursuit of all game to be governed by a knowledge of its par- ticular food, so it may be said of the sea trout ; their motions while in the salt water being regulated by those of the minute fish on which they live. Both minnows and shrimp are more or less affected by the action of the tide, particularly the lat- ter, which in its reflux sweeps the passive shrimp in shoals across a sandy eddy of the bay, into the very mouths of the expectant trout, who there collect and lie in wait to feast up- on them.” The last mentioned species, ( Lepomis Salmonea,) is pe- culiar to our southern rivers, and with many southerners go under the name of Trout Bass , or Brown Bass. They grow to a much larger size than the northern trout, varying in * Wnquoit Bay, upon Capo Cod, and Firo Placo, L. I. 70 THE TROUT. length from 6 to 24 inches ; they are of a darker color, and do not possess that beauty of appearance when out of the water, or that delicious flavor when upon the table ; neither do they contribute as much to the Angler’s sport, as those of more northern latitudes. Another species of trout, mentioned by Smith, is the Hucko Trout, ( Salmo Hucho ,) resembling very much the sea trout; it is foupd, on careful inspection, to be more slender, and to have a greater number of red spots ; the back is dusky ; the ventral fin has a yellowish tinge ; all the others are of a palish purple ; the tail is forked, and the fish measures sometimes four fept through ; ordinarily they are only about two, and caught by the hook. This trout certainly exists in the large rivers and ponds in the interior, but deteriorate in size They are brought from New-Hampshire in the winter, frozen for the markets, and from the northern parts of Maine, where specimens have been taken, large as any produced in the great rivers of Europe. There is no fish that varies so much in size, shape, color and flavor, as the trout. They are found in different varieties in the same stream, and vary so much in external appearance and flavor in some parts of the Union, as to lead to different appellations from experienced and scientific men. They usually spawn in the months of September and Oc- tober. The best time for taking them is from April until August ; but if the weather is mild and pleasant, they are often taken in fine condition and of large size, in the month of March. They are not, however, considered in perfection until the months of May and June, until which time, owing to the coldness of our climate, they do not obtain sufficient quantity of the proper food to make them active and healthy. They are also more difficult to take, and will give the sports- man more pleasure than in the months ot March and April, when they bite more freely, but not with that zest and vigor. THE TROUT. 71 Of the nature and habits of the trout, Walton says: “ And you are to noto that he continues many months out of season ; for it may be observed of the trout, that he is like the buck or the ox, that will not be fat in many months, though he go in the very same pastures that horses do, which will be fat in one month. And so you may observe, that most other fishes recover strength and grow sooner fat and in season than the trout doth. “ And next you are to note, that till the sun gets to such a height as to warm the earth and water, the trout is sick and lean, and lousy, and unwholesome ; for you shall in winter find him to have a big head, and then to be lank and thin, and lean ; at which time many of them having sticking to them sags, or trout-lice ; which is a kind of worm, iu shape like a clove, or pin with a big head, and sticks close to him and sucks his moisture; those I think the trout breeds himself; and never thrives till he frees himself from them, which is when warm weather comes ; and then as he grows stronger, he gets from the dead still water into the sharp stream and the gravel, and there rubs ofT these worms or lice ; and then as he grows stronger, so he gets him into swifter and swilter streams, and there lies at the watch for any Hy or minnow that comes near him." The North Country Angler, an English writer, says: “ The burn (or common) trout, grows fast if it has plenty of food and good water ; several experiments have been made in fish-pomls ; some fed by river water, some by clear fluent springs, into which the young have been put about live or six months old — that is, in September or October, reckoning from April, when they come out ot their spawning beds, at which time they will be six or Beveu inches long; and though there has been but little ditference in their age and size when put into the pond, yet in 18 months after there will be a sur- prising change. 1 have seen a pond drained ten mouths after 72 THE TROUT. the fish were put into it, which was in July, when they were about 15 months old, at which time they were 15 or 16 inches, others not above 12. But when the pond was drained ten months after, in March, when they were almost two years old, some were 21 or 22 inches, and weighed three pounds or more ; others were about 16 inches; and a fourth part not above 12. I do not know to what we can attribute this dif- ference ; it could not be either in the food or the water, or the weather, they faring all alike in these. But if I may be allowed my opinion, perhaps some of the fry may have been the spawn of those that were only 17 months old, which is the soonest that any of them spawn; others of parents 29 months, or two years and a half old ; and others a year older. This difference in the age of the parent trout may, I believe, occasion the difference in the size of their breed; otherwise I cannot account for it. Trout, in a good pond, will grow much faster than in some rivers, because they do not range so much in feeding. How long they live cannot be determined in any other way so well as by observation on those in ponds, which observation I never had an opportunity of making my- self, and therefore shall only mention what a gentleman told me. Ho assured me that at four or five years old they were at their full growth, which was, in some, at about 30 inches, and in many much less; that they continued about three years pretty nearly the same in size and goodness ; two years after they grew big headed and smaller bodied, aud died iu the winter after that change ; but he thought the head did not grow larger, but only seemed to be so, because the body decayed ; so that, according to this gentleman’s computation, nine or ten years is the term of their life ; and yet I think they may live longer in some rivers, and grow to a much greater size, when they have liberty to go into the tide-way and salt water.” The evidence of other writers goes to show that they live THE TROUT. 73 to a much greater age, an instance being known in England where a trout remained in a well upwards of sixty years, be- ing visited by the neighboring country as a remarkable curi- osity. Another one, for 28 years was an inhabitant of a well at Dumbarton Castle, Scotland. It had never increased in size from the time it was placed there, when it weighed about a pound, and became bo tame that it would receive its food from the hands of the soldiers. When in prime condition the trout is short and thick, having a small head and broad tail ; the spots on the sides are red tinged with purple, and the belly of a beautiful bright silver color. This fish, from its extreme beauty, delicacy of flavor and extraordinary activity as a game fish, has attracted the atten- tion of all classes of people, from the boy with a pin-hook, to those that have swayed the destiny of empire. The divine, the philosopher, the poet, the artist, and the statesman, from the earliest dates, have enjoyed many days of recreation in his pursuit, sang songs to his praise, or written pages of in- struction of their own experience in taking him from his na- tive element. Under such circumstances, it would be super- fluous, at this late day, to attempt to give any new instruc- tions to the young Angler, or the seeker after piscatorial in- formation. And as the opinions and practice of well known advisers will no doubt be preferred, they are here given, with 6uch comments as may be found necessary. There are three different methods pursued in the capture of the trout : — angling at the top, with a natural or artificial fly, grasshopper, or other small insect ; at tho middle, with a minnow, shrimp, or similar small fish ; and at the bottom, with a worm, or different kinds of pastes. Of Fly Fishing. Of all the various modes adopted and contrived by the ingenuity of man for pulling out the “ cun- 74 THE 1 ROUT. ning trout,” this at once recommends itself as the perfection of the art ; but as it is considered by a majority of our brethren more difficult than worm fishing, it has many objectors. But the difficulties are more in the imagination than the practice, and when once understood, it gives the highest pleasure of the art. Others think they will not take the fly at all in this country, and having fished with a worm all their life, they cannot be persuaded that with a simple fly made of feathers, they can take as many fish, and often times more. Tell them that Isaac Walton, Sir Humphrey Davy, and somo of the greatest Anglers* the world ever saw, adopted this mode altogether, and that all writers on Angling have devoted pages of their works to explanatory drawings, &c., in refer- ence to it; that it is the most gentlemanly, the most elegant, the least trouble ; that you can take your rod enclosed in a small bag a couple of feet long, and about half a pound in weight, or in the more portable form of a walking stick, and your flies in your pocket-book ; that you can traverse the stream, and enjoy its beautiful scenery for miles and miles with the least possible trouble; and they will still adhere to their only method of worm fishing. From the fact of there being comparatively few who practice with the fly, some English writers are of the opinion that there are no jly-jiskers in America , and many of our own countrymen think there are very few; but this is a great mistake. There are hundreds of good fly anglers, and many that can throw a fly with the most experienced of Europe. In the Spring, when the streams are muddy, the worm, of course, is preferred, as it is the only method that can be practised, owing to the state of the water, and also from the fact that the trout lie deep, and in the holes under the banks. It is also sometimes better towards the close of the day in summer ; the worm will then tempt the trout when nothing else will. But as a general rule, in clear streams, no matter THE TROUT. 75 in what part of tho country, in the summer months, the arti- ficial fly can be used with success. Fly-fishing is usually practised with a short one-handed rod, from ten to twelve feet in length, or a two-handed rod, from fifteen to eighteen feet in length. Tho first mentioned is the most common in use, and is calculated for the majority of our streams, which are small, and require but little length of rod or line. Attached to the rod should be a reel, contain- ing from thirty to fifty yards of hair, grass, silk, or silk and hair line — tho latter description should be used if it can be procured, tapering from the tenth of an inch almost to a point ; to this should be attached a leader of from one to two yards in length ; and finally your fly, on a light shotted length of gut ; if you wish to use two or three flies, place them ou your leader with short gut, about 24 inches apart. The latter description of rod is used in larger streams, where it is necessary to throw a great distance ; for this pur- pose, the reel should be large enough to contain 100 yards of line, with the other tackle precisely the same as with the smaller rod. It should bo recollected that the trout rods should be made similar to the salmon rods, and of the lightest woods, as formerly described. The above descriptions are generally used in this country, but the following information from Holland, one of the latest and best English winters, may bo preferred : ' “ A slight rod, 12 feet long, or, if wanted for a narrow or wooded stream, one of 10 or 12 feet only would bo more convenient, a reel containing 30 yards of line, a book of arti- ficial flies, and a landing-net, and you are fully equipped for tlie sport. * * * I have already said that a one-handed rod should be 10 or 12 feet long, and a two-handed rod from 1G to 18 feet; to either of which must be attached a reel containing 30 yards of twisted silk and hair line, tapering from a moderate thickness up to a few hairs, at the end of 76 THE TROUT. which you are by a loop to attach your bottom tackle. This should be made of round, even gut, and three yards long ; some persons prefer four yards; but I think too great a length of gut increases the difficulty in casting the line. These lines should also taper gradually, the gut being much stronger at the end which is to be attached to the line on the reel, than a£ the end to which the stretcher fly is to be fixed. When you fish with only two flies, the second (or drop fly) should be at a distance of 36 or 40 inches from the bottom or stretcher fly ; but if you use three flies, the first drop should be only 34 inches from the stretcher, and the second 30 inches from the first. These drop flies are attached to the line by loops, and should not be more than three inches long; and by having the gut rather stronger than for the end fly, they will stand nearly at a right angle from the line. I re* commend the beginner to commence with one fly only ; but at most he must not use more than two ; and, as for his mode of casting or throwing his fly, now his tackle is prepared, I fear little useful instruction can be given, as skill and dexterity, in this point, must depend upon practice. I may, however, advise him not to attempt to cast a long line at first, but to try his strength and gain facility by degrees. lie must make up his mind to hear many a crack, like a coachman’s whip, nnd find the consequent loss of his flies before ho can direct his stretcher to a given point, and let it fall on the water as light as a gossamer.” Cotton says : “For the length of your rod, you are always to be governed by the breadth of the river you shall choose to angle at; and for a trout river one of five or six yards is commonly enough ; and longer, though never so neatly and artificially made, it ought not to be, if you intend to fish at ease ; and if otherwise, where lies the sport ? The length of your line, to a man that knows how to handle his rod and to cast it, is no matter of encumbrance, except in woody places, THE TROUT. 77 and in landing of a fish, which every one that can afford to angle for pleasure has somebody to do for him.* And the length of line is a mighty advantage to the fishing at a dis- tance ; and to fish fine and far off, is the first and principal rule for trout angling. Your line in this case should never be less thau one, nor ever exceed two hairs, next to the hook ; for one (though some, I know, will pretend to more art than their fellows) is indeed too few, the least accident, with the finest hand, being sufficient to break it; but he that cannot kill a trout of twenty inches long with two, in a river clear of wood and weeds, deserves not the nara$ of a true angler. “ Now, to have your linet as it ought to be, two of the finest lengths nearest the hook should be of two hairs a-piece ; the next three lengths above them of three ; the next three above them of four ; and so of five, and six, and seven, to the very top ; by which means your rod and tackle will in a manner taper from your very hand to your hook ; your line will fall much better and straighter, and cast your fly to any certain place to which the hand and eye shall direct it, with less weight and violence, than would otherwise circle the water and fright away the fish. “ In casting your line, do it always before you, and so that your fly may first fall upon the water, and us little of your line with it as possible ; though if the wind be stiff, you will of necessity be compelled to drown a good part of your line to keep your fly under water. And iri casting your fly you must aim at the farther or nearer bank, as the wind serves * This is the method of fishing without a reel, nod with very fine hair lines, mostly practised in Cotton’s day. We hardly think that ovory body in Republican America, that can afford to fish for pleasure, has an attendant to land his fish for him ! t This mode is given for the benefit of those who live in the country, are obliged to make their own lines, and find it necessary to fish with- out a reel. 73 THE TROUT. your turn, which also will be with and against you on the same side, several times in an hour, as the river winds in its course, and you will be forced to angle up and down by turns accordingly, but are to endeavor, as much as you can, to have the wind evermore on your back. And always bo sure to stand as far off the bank as the length will give you leave, when you throw on the contrary side; though when the wind will not permit you so to do, and that you are con- strained to angle on the same side whereon you stand, you must then stand on the very brink of the river, and cast your fly at the utmost length of your rod and line, up or down the river, as the gale serves.” Management of the Line, when Fishing cither with one Fly , or two or more Flics ■ The following minute and easy method of the management of the line, and throwing the fly, from Taylor’s “ Art of Angling,” will be found to be excel- lent advice to the young beginner. “ When you have fixed your rod properly, with your winch thereon, and brought your line from it through the rings of your rod, loop on to it by the strongest end your foot length,* which should be about three yards and a half long, made of good strong silk-worm gut, well tied, and the knots neatly whipped, running (very little) finer towards the bot* tom end, at which place there must be a neatly whipped loop; then take your end fly, or stretcher, which should be made of one or two lengths of good level gut, full as fine, or a little finer, than the bottom link of your foot length, tied and whipped neatly together, and looped nicely at the end; loop this to the end of your gut length ; and then, your drop fly- just above a knot, where whipped, about a yard from tho end fly, to hang from the line not more than two or three Called in this country a loader, os described on page 32. THE TROUT. 79 inches. If you choose to fish with more, keep them all at the same distance. And observe, that if your droppers be larger than, or even as large as, your stretcher, you will not be able to throw a good line : but a beginner should never use more than one fly. “ When thus prepared, let out the line about half as long again as the rod ; and holding the line properly in one hand, and the line, just above the fly, in the other, give your rod a motion from right to left, and as you move the rod backwards, in order to throw out the line, dismiss the lino from your hand at the same time ; and try several throws at this length. Then let out more line and try that ; still using more and more till you can manage any length needful ; but about nine yards is quite sufficient for a learner to practice with. And observe, that in raising your line in order to throw it again, you should wave the rod a little round your head, and not bring it directly backwards ; nor must you return the line too Boon, nor until it has streamed its full length behind you, or you will certainly whip off your end fly. There is great art in making your line fall light on the water, and showing the flies well to the fish. The best way that I can direct is, that when you have thrown out your line, contriving to let it fall lightly and naturally, you should raise your rod geutly and by de- grees; sometimes with a kind of tremulant flourish, which will bring the flies in a little towards you; still letting them go down with the stream, but never drawing them against it, for it is unnatural ; and before the line comes too near you throw it again. When you see a fish rise at a natural fly, throw out about a yard above him, but not directly over his head ; and let your fly or flies move gently towards liim, which will show it to him in a more natural form, and tempt him the more to take it. Experience and observation alone, however, can make a mau a complete adept in the art, so as 80 THE TROUT. to enable him to throw his fly behinil bushes and trees, into holes, under banks, and other places mentioned as the ‘ trout haunts,' and where the best fish arc to be found.” There is much diversity of opinion about the manner of fishing, whether up or down the stream ; the great majority of Anglers, both in Europe and this country, favor the latter method, and a very few the former. Holland remarks on this : “ Some persons recommend fishing up the stream, and throwing the fly before them. For my own part, (after much experience,) whenever I can do so with convenience, I cast my fly above me, and across the stream, drawing it gently towards me. If the wind should be against you, you will he constrained to stand close to the water’s edge, and make your cast close to the bank on which you stand, either up or down the stream, as the wind may serve. Avoid, if possible, fishing with the sun behind you. ns the moving shadow of yourself and rod will alarm the fish. The finer the tackle (particularly the bottom tackle) and the lighter the fly falls on the water, the greater will be your sport; indeed some Anglers use only a singlo hair for their bottom tackle ; but when the water you fish is weedy, or much wooded, a single hair is difficult to manage; but in ponds or streams, free from impediments, it may be used by a skilful hand to a great advantage.” Of Bush-Fishing, sometimes called Fibbing, Dabbing, or Dating. This is a cunning mode of fishing on the part of the Angler, quite equal to any of the curious manoeuvres of tho trout himself. It is practised in the summer months, when the water is low, and the bushes are in loaf, thereby giving the Angler a hiding place ; and when it is almost impossible to take him by any other method ; and although it requires oxtremo care, and all tho ingenuity of tho fisher, it will THE TROUT. 01 amply repay him, by the size and quality of the game, the largest, oldest, most wary of the tribe, being often taken by this process. Holland gives the following instructions : tl The Angler must be provided with a 14 feet rod, with a stiff top, and strong running tackle ; he will seldom have to use more than a yard of line, the bottom of which should be of strong silk worm gut. I recommend strong tackle, because in confined situations, overhung with wood, you will not have room to play your fish, but must hold him tight and depend on the strength of your tackle. “ The size of your hook must depend upon the size of the fly, from No. 7 to 9 for small flies and grubs, and for beetles No. 4 or 5. For bush-fishing, you should be provided with well scoured brandlings and red worms, cad-baits,* clock- baits, earth-grubs, beetles, grasshoppers, and a horn of flies; or at least as many of the above as you can procure. 11 Great caution is necessary in using your rod and line, for if there are few bushes or brambles to conceal you, the water must be approached warily, as the large trout often lie near the surface, and if you are once seen they will fly from you. If the water should be deep, dark, and overhung with thick foliage, so that you can scarcely find an open space for your bait, your line must be shortened to half a yard, and sometimes less. 11 If your flies are small, use two of them at once, as they frequently fall in the water in couples. When duping with the fly, if you see your fish, drop the fly gently on the water about a foot before him, and if you are not seen, he will eagerly take it. When your fish is struck, do not allow him to get his head down, for fear cf roots and weeds, but keep him to the top of the water, when his fins and strength will * Cnd-baits and clock-baits arc not known amongst Anglers in this country; the others will bo found useful if they can bo procured. 82 THE TROUT. be of little use to him; and in this situation, with good tackle, you may soon exhaust him, and make him your own by a landing-net, the handle of which should be two yards long; or he may be landed by a hook or gaff, with a long handle, and this in some situations, amidst close thorny brambles, will be found more useful than the landing-net, which is liable to be caught in the bushes. When you use the worm, caddis, or any other grub, you will require a single shot, No. 6,* to sink your bait, for it cannot sink too slowly, or cause) too little disturbance in the water.” The North Countiy Angler says : “ There are some obser- vations I have made, which the Angler may find the benefit of ; one is, that although the shade of trees and bushes, is much longer and greater on the south or sun side of the river, than on the north ; yet I always find the most and largest trout on that side. I suppose the sun’s being more intense and warm on the north side, may occasion more Hies, erucas, and insects, to creep upon those bushes, and consequently the more fish will frequent them. “ When the trees or bushes are very close, I advise the bush Angler to take a hedge-bill or hatchet, and cut off two or three branches here and there, at proper places and dis- tances, and so make little convenient openings, at which ho may easily put in his rod and line ; but this is to be done some time before you come there to fish. “ If you come to a woody place, where you have no such conveniences, and where perhaps there is a long pool, and no angling with a fly, or throwing the rod, there you may be sure of many large fish. For that very reason, I have chosen such places, though very troublesome, when I have been * It has not been thought necessary to remark upon the sizes of hooks, shot, or sinkers, in speaking generally, ns they should vary materially in tho various waters where the diflerout sizes of fish arc found, and whore •treums run moro or less rapid. THE TROUT. 83 forced to creep under trees and bushes, dragging my rod after me, with the very top of it in my hand, to get near the water; and I have been well paid for my trouble. Whilst you are getting in your rod, throw a brandling, or grub, or what you fish with, into the water, which will make the fish take your bait the more boldly. 11 There are some pools that have no bushes at all, but only hollow banks, in some places under which the great fish will lie in the day time. I have gone softly to such places, and have dropped in a suitable bait, close by the bank, and have presently had a good fish. When I use cork, chamois, or buff, instead of natural baits, I always drop them in strong scented oil, in shade-fishing, because the fish comes slowly to the bait, and if he does not smell something like the natural bait, he will not take it. though well imitated.” Cotton gives the following, with which wo conclude our remarks on Daping or Dibbing. 11 These are to bo angled with a short line, not much more than half the length of your rod, if the air be still, or with a longer, very near or all out as long as your rod, if you have any wind to carry it from you. And this way of fishing we call Daping, Dabbing, or Dibbing, wherein you are always to have your line Hying before you, up or down the river, as the wind serves, and to angle as near as you can to the bank of the same side whereon you stand, though where you see a fish near, you may guide your fly quick over him, whether in the middle or on the contrary side ; and if you are pretty well out of sight, either by kneeling, err the interposition of a bank or bush, you may be almost sure to raise and take him too, if it be presently done ; the fish will otherwise peradventure be re- moved to some other place, if it be in still deeps, where he is always on the motion, and roving up and down to look out for prey, though in a stream you may always, almost, espe- cially if there bo a good store, find him in the same place. 84 THE TROUT. Your line ought, in this case, to be three good hairs noxt the hook ; both by reason you are in this kind of angling to ex- pect the biggest fish, and also that, wanting length to give him line after he has struck, you must be forced to tug for it; to which I will add, that not an inch of your line being to be suffered to touch the water in Dibbing, it may be allowed to be the stronger.” Having given two of the methods of taking the trout, it will be well to introduce the reader to his hiding-places. On this subject, Hofland gives the best and most minute infor- mation. “ He is fond of swift, clear streams, running over chalk, limestone, or gravelly bottoms ; but he is more fre- quently in the eddies by the side of the stream, than in the midst of it. A mill-tail is a favorite haunt of the trout ; for he finds protection under the apron, which is generally hol- low, and has the advantage of being in the eddy, by the side of the mill-race, awaiting his food. He delights also in cas- cades, tumbling bays, or wiers. The larger trout generally have their hold under roots of overhanging trees, and beneath hollow banks in the deepest parts of the river. The junction of little rapids, formed by water passing round an obstruction in the midst of the general current, is a likely point at which to raise a trout ; also at the roots of trees, or in other places where the froth of the stream collects. All such places are favorable for sport, as insects follow the same course as the bubbles, and are there sought by the fish.' After sunset, in summer, the large fish leave their haunts, and may be found in the sewers, and at the tails of streams ; and during tliis time, so long as the Angler cau see his fly on the water, he may expect sport.” Of Fishing in the Middle , with a Minnow, or any Small Fish. The rod used in this kind of angling, is from 12 to 16 feet in length, with a staffer top than that used for fly-fisliing, THE TROUT. 85 and goe9 under the name of a baitaod. The smaller, say 12 feet, for small wading streams , and the longer for wider and deeper waters. Attached should be an American* reel, holding from 30 to 50 yards of American laidi grass, or silk line, with from two to three yards of silk-worm gut, termi- nating with a Limerick hook, from No. 2 to 5, according to the size of your bait, fastened by a loop as before described. For baiting the minnow, pass your hook in at the mouth and out at the giils, then in again at the commencement of the + dorsal fin and out again just beyond, tying the hook at each end with a piece of thin silk or thread. By this method you can, if you use a live minnow, and are very careful , keep your bait animated for a great length of time. The North Country Angler gives a very good mode of baiting with the minnow, as follows : “ I have a gils e-hook (No. 3 or 4) at the end of the line, but wrapped no further on the end of the shank than to make it secure, and leave more room to bait. An inch, or very little more, from the shank end of the gilse-hook, I wrap on a strong hook, about half the size of the other. I put the point of the large hook in at the mouth of the minnow, and out at the tail, on the right side of the minnow, binding it half round as I put it in ; then 1 put the other hook in, below die under chap, which keeps the minnow’s mouth quite close. “ When I am in no hurry, I tie the tail and hook together, with a very small white thread ; before I enter the little hook, I draw up the minnow to its full length, and make it fit the bending of the great hook, to make it twirl round * The imported reels are used to a great extent, but thoso of Ameri- can manufacture are much superior, and should bo preferred. t This description of line has of Into years become much used. Tho grass is imported from Canton nnd Inid hero, or taken in a finished state, untwisted, and relaid, which makes it much stronger and firmer than when first imported. 86 THE TROUT. when it is drawn in the water. When all is in order, I take the line in my left hand, a little above the bait, and throw it under-hand, lifting up my right and the rod, that the bait may fall gently on the water. “ I stand at the very top of the stream, as far off as my tackle will permit, and let the bait drop in a yard from the middle of it; I draw the minnow by gentle pulls, of about a yard at a time, across the stream, turning my rod up the water, within half a yard of its surface, keeping my eye fixed on the minnow. When a fish takes it, ho generally hooks himself ; however, I give him a smart stroke, and, if he does not get off then, I am pretty sure of him. In this manner I throw in three or four times, at the upper part of a stream, but never twice in the same place, but a yard lower every cast. I always throw quite over the stream, but let the bait cross it in a round, like a semicircle, about a foot below the surface, which two of No. 3 or 4 shot, which I always have upon my line, nine or ten inches from the hooks, will sink it to. When I am drawing the bait across the stream, I keep the top of the rod within less than a yard from the water, and draw it downwards, that the bait may be at a greater distance from me, and the first thing that the fish will see. Some* times I can see the fish before he takes the bait, and then 1 give in the rod a little, that the minnow may, as it were, meet him half-way ; but if I think he is shy, I pull it away, and do not throw it in again till he has got to his feeding place. “ The twirling of the minnow is the beauty of this kind of angling, the fish seeing it a greater distance, and fancying it is making all the haste it can to escape from them ; and they make the same haste to catch it.” Hofland has the following : “ The minnow rod should be of bamboo cane, at least 16 feet long, with a tolerable stiff top ; and 20 or 25 yards of line, something stronger than THE TROUT. 87 your fly-line, will be sufficient. Some Anglers use a rod 20 feet long. To enable them to fish a wide stream, this length of rod is necessary, as the line, in spinning the minnow, is somewhat short of the rod; if you wade the stream, a rod of 12 feet will be long enough. u For Bailing with the Minnow. In the first place, pro- cure a piece of brass wire, about three inches long ; one end of which must be hammered into a small loop, and the other ond flattened with a hammer, and sharpened in the shape of a spear head. This must be drawn through a tapering piece of lead,* cast for the purpose. Wires of this description may be kept by you, of different lengths, to suit the size of the bait-fish used. “ Enter the spear end of the leaded wire at the mouth of the minnow, and bring it out at the fork of the tail. Then take a triangular hook, formed by tying together three No. 8 or 9 hooks on a piece of strong gut, one inch and a quarter long, with a small loop on the end. Now', with a baiting- needle, enter the point under the back fin of the bait, when one of the triangular hooks will enter the bait under the back fin, the other two will lie by its sides, and the loop of the gut will be even with the brass loop in the minnow’s mouth. 11 You must now prepare a minnow-trace, of three yards of gut, at one end of which tie on a Limerick hook No. 9 ; 12 inches above this, place a fine swivel, and 24 inches higher up another swivel, and your trace is ready. Next, enter the hook at the end of your trace, at the back of the bait’s head, and pass it through the two loops now in its mouth, and bring it out under the lips, when the bait’s mouth will bo closed. Then, bend gently the spear of brass wire, so as to gently curve the tail of the minnow, and then tie the tail fast to the wire with white thread, and you are ready for the stream.” * Theso articles can be purchased at the tacklo stores, of different sizes and descriptions. 88 THE TROUT. The following is from Walton, who by many writers was considered the best minnow Angler in England: “ And of these minnows, first you are to know, that the biggest size is not the best, and next, that tho middle size and the whitest are the best; and then you are to know, that your minnow must be put on your hook, that it must turn round when it is drawn against the stream ; and that it may turn nimbly, you must put on a big sized hook, as I shall now direct you, which is this : put your hook in at his mouth and out at his gill; then having drawn your hook two or three inches be- yond or through his gill, put it again through his mouth, and the point or beard out at bis tail ; and then tie the hook and his tail about very neatly, with a white thread, which will make it apter to turn quick in tho water ; that done, pull back that part of your line which was slack when you did put your hook into the minnow the second time ; I say, pull that part of your line back so that it shall fasten the head, so that the body of the minnow shall be almost straight * on your hook ; this done, try how it will turn by drawing it across tho water, against a stream; and if it do not turn nimbly, then turn the tail a little to the right or left hand, and try again till it turn quick ; for if not, you are in danger to catch nothing; for know, that it is impossible for a minnow to turn too quick.” The Minnow is beautifully and faithfully imitated in England, and imported into this country, and will be found a valuable addition to the Angler’s stock of artificial baits.f Although in this and the following methods, tho float is not mentioned as an article of tackle, it is much used by * Rennie, in his notes on Walton, says : “ I have never boon able to cause a minnow to swim well in trolling, uuless tho toil was bent nearly to a semicircle.’’ t Smearing tho artificial baits with fish-slime is recommended by Rennie. THE TROUT. 89 Anglers generally. It should be of small size, and made of light cork, or quills, suited to the weight of your shot and the current of the stream. Of Bottom or Worm-Fishing . This is, and has been from the earliest periods, the standard mode of trout angling. It is practised principally at the opening and closing of the sea- son by Anglers generally; but by some of our piscatorial friends, who adjure fly-fishing, from the time the trees bud, until autumn scatters their leaves upon the ground. The rod generally used is from 12 to 15 feet in length, for small streams, and from 15 to 20 feet (according to circum- stances) for the larger. The reel, and other appurtenances, should be similar to that described for minnow-fishing. Hofland says : “ For worm-fishing, your rod should be of bamboo cane, and from 1G to 20 feet long, and tho line gene- rally something shorter than the rod ; but it may be shortened or lengthened, according to circumstances, by your reel. The best worms for a large trout are the lob-worm and the marsh- worm, but with many Anglers tho brandling is a great favorite. “ The method of casting your line will depend upon the nature of the water; but as a general rule I may say, keep tile point of your rod, as nearly as possible, perpendicular to your bait, steadily following it, as the bait drags along the bot- tom, with the point of your rod, and when you feel a bite, let the fish turn before you strike. Unless tho stream be rapid or deep, a single shot (No. 4) will be sufficient to sink your worm ; but in a deep heavy current, two or three more of the same size will be required. In fishing across a stream with a single hair, and a small red- worm, run, from your reel, line to the length of the rod, and, taking hold of the line about 12 inches above the bait, with your left hand draw it towards you till the line tightens, and tho top ot the rod 90 THE TROUT. bends. Holding the rod firmly iti the right hand, let go the line, and with a little practice you will find the bait drop lightly into the water at the extremity of the rod and line; and then, either draw your line gently across the water, or carry your bait down the stream, as above directed. The eddy by the side of a mill-tail, or flood-gate, or water-full, is a good place to try the lob-worm. The deep holes near overhanging trees and old stumps, and those parts of the river where the stream has undermined the banks, are also the haunts of the largest trout. “ When the water is discolored by rain, your tackle may bo strong, and you will not easily be seen by the fish; but if the water be clear, and the day bright, your only chance for taking trout with the worm, will be by using fine tackle, and keeping completely out of sight. “ The lob-worm is also used, without any shot on the line, after sunset in summer, by drawing it on the top of the water, across a sharp mill-stream, when the trout will rise and take the bait at the top of the water, as they would the fly; and in this manner very large trout are frequently taken. “ The gentle, or maggot, is a good bait for a trout, during tho months of June, July, and August, and may be used, with a small float, carrying one or two shot-corns, in mill-dams, ponds, and other still waters, allowing your bait to nearly touch the ground. “ 1 shall now describe a method of bottom-fishing, with a bait which I have found, in certain situations and seasons, more successful than any other. The same tackle may be U9ed as before described for the gentle, i. c. a fine gut bot- tom, with hook No. 10, and a small quill float, carrying one or two small shot-corns. u Procure a wide-necked bottle, and fill it with blue bottle-flics, or the flies caught on newly scattered cow or horse-dung, and wi;h two of these flies bait your hook, and THE TROUT. 91 let it nearly touch the ground. In this manner I have caught many fine trout in mill-dams, ponds, and deep quiet waters, during July and August, when not a single fish would rise at any kind of artificial fiy which could be offered. I have never seen the method described by any author on the subject, but I can with confidence recommend it to my brothers of the angle, at those times when the usual baits fail to procure a dish of fish. “ When you have struck a good fish, keep him as near the top of the water as possible, and carry liim down the stream above the weeds, and, if you succeed in getting him into clear water, with a little care he is your own.” Cotton gives the following method of angling by the hand with a ground bait: “ And by much the best of all other, is with a line full as long, or a yard longer than your rod; with no more than one hair* next the hook, and for two or three lengths above it; and no more than one small pellet of shot for your plumb ; your hook little ; your worms of the smaller brandlings, very well scoured ; and only one upon your hook at a time, which is thus to be baited : The point of your hook is to be put in at the very tag of his tail, and run up his body quite over all the arming, and still stripped on mi inch at least upon the hair; the head remaining part hanging downward. And with this line and hook, thus baited, you are evermore to angle in the streams, always in a clear’ rather than a troubled water, and always up the river, still casting out your worm before you with a light one-handed rod, like an artificial fly, where it will be taken, sometimes at the top, or within a very little of the superficies of the water, and almost always before that light plumb can sink it to the bot- tom; both by reason of the stream, mid also that you must always keep your worm in motion by drawing still back * If the American Angler prefer any of Walton's or Cotton’s instruc- tions, lie should iu all cases use line gut, instead of hair as described. 92 THE TROUT. towards you, as if you were angling with a fly. And believe me, whoever will try, shall find this the best way of all others to angle with a worm, in a bright water especially; but then bis rod must be very light and pliant, and very true and finely made, which, with a skilful hand will do wonders, and in a clear 6tream is undoubtedly the best way of angling for a trout or grayling, with a worm, by many degrees, that any man can make choice of, and of most ease and delight to the Angler. To which let me add, that if the Angler be of a constitution that will suffer him to wade, and will slip into the tail of a stream, to the calf of the leg or the knee, and so keep off the bank, he shall almost take what fish he pleases.” The following pertinent remarks for clear weather, from Blaine, should have place iu the memory of every lover of trout angling : li Trout aro to be taken in clear weather, when they will not touch either minnow or fly; and there is certainly more art and sportsmanship in fishing with the worm at that time, than some people imagine or acknowledge. When to tho advantage of bright weather arc added those of clear and shallow streams, much artifice must be employed. Your tackle very fine, your hook small, (No. 5, 6, or 7,) and your baits well scoured and lively. A wheel will enable you to vary the length of your line as occasion dictates; and though in general it must be as long or longer than your rod, yet where there is wood, &c. &.C., you may by shortening it, get at the holes, and still contrive to kr.cp out of sight , for com- pletely so to be must never bo forgotten — kneel, stoop or stand — out of sight you must be; anti then if you can lightly and neatly drop in a lively brandling, near the likely holds or haunts in a strong stream, especially near the top of it, let the sun shine ever so bright, be tho wind rough or calm, and the water ever so clear, you will kill fish when they are not to be taken by any other inode.” THE TROUT. 93 Franks gives the following pleasant mode of killing a trout, which is well worthy of repetition : “ And now, Theophilus, I must reprove your precipitancy, because a great error in young Anglers; be mindful, there- fore, to observe directions in handling and managing your rod and line, and cautiously keeping out of sight; all of which precautions are requisite accomplishments, which of necessity ought to be understood by every ingenious Angler ; and so is that secret of striking, which should never be used with violence, because by a moderate touch, and a slender pro- portion of strength, the artist for the most part hath best success. Another caution you must take along with you ; I mean when you observe game to make out, that is, when he bolts, or when he launcheth himself to the utmost extent of your rod and line, which a well-fed fish at all times, fre- quently attempts, upon the least advantage he gains of the Angler; be mindful, therefore, to throw him line enough, if, provided, you purpose to see his destruction ; yet with this caution, that you be not too liberal. On the other hand, too straight a line brings equal hazard, so that to poise your fish and your foresight together, as by keeping one eye at the point of your rod, and the other be sure you direct ou your game, which comes nearest the mediums of art, and the rules and rudiments of your precedent directions. But this great round may be easily solved, for if when you discover your fish fag his fins, you may rationally conclude he then struggles with death, and then is your time to triffle him on shore on some smooth shelf of sand, where you may boldly land him, before his scales encumber the soil. “ Lest precipitancy spoil sport, I’ll preponder my rudi- ments and prognosticate, here’s a fish, or something like it, a fair hansel for a foolish fisher. This capering, for aught I know, may cost him his life, for I resolve to hold his nose to the grindstone : dunce on and die, that is the way to your 94 THE TROUT. silent sepulchre, for upon that silty, gravelly, shelf of sand I resolve to land him, or lose all I have. And now I fancy him weary of life, as aged people that are weary of infirmities, yet I want courage to encounter him, lest fearing to lose him, which if I do I impair my reputation. However, here is nobody but trees to reprove me, except these rocks, and they tell no tales. Well, then, as he wants no agility to evade me, I’ll endeavor with activity to approach him, so that the difference between us will be only this, that he covets acquaintance with but one element, and 1 would compel him to examine another. Now he runs to divert me or himself, but I must invite him nearer home, for I fancy none such distance. “ Though his fins fag, and his tail wriggles, his strength declines, his gills look languid, and his mettle declineth — all of which interpret tokens of submission — still, the best news I bring him is summons of death. Yet, let not my rashness pre-engage me to the loss of my game, for, to neglect my ru- diments is to ruin my design, winch in plain terms, is the ruin of this resolute fish, who, seemingly, now measures and mingles his proportion with more than one element, and, doomed to a trance, he prostrates himself on the surface of the calms, dead to my apprehension, save only I want credit to believe him dead, when, calling to mind my former pre- cipitancy, that invited me to a loss, and so this adventure may prove, if I look not well about me, to land and strand him on that shelf of sand, where I resolve with my rod to survey his dimensions. Welcome on shore, my languishing combatant, if only to entertain my friend Arnoldus.” The following beautiful lines from the poet and fisherman Gay, “ run ” directly from the 11 reel” of his imagination, and from the crystal 11 waters ” of the fount of inspiration; every “ line ” 11 plumb'd " to the nicety of a “ hair” the ** point ” needs but the aid of the “ Jly ” press of the printer THE TROUT. 95 and the “ cast ” of the founder, to stereotype on, or cause it to “ worm ” itself into, the “ gentle ” affections of every true piscatorial sportsman, and make it ever “float ” around the “ net ’’-work of his memory, giving him “ buoyancy ” of spirit, a “full length ” of courage, and a “ mess ” of patience, sufficient to make him master of his “ rod.” “ He lifts his silver gills above the flood, And greedily sucks in lh’ unfaithful food, Then downward plunges with the fraudful prey, And bears with joy the littlo spoil away ; , Soon, in smart pain, he feels the dire mistake, Lashes the wave, and beats the foamy lako With sudden rago ho now aloft appears, And in his eye convulsive anguish bears ; And now again, impatient of the wound, He rolls, and writhes his straining body round, Then headlong shoots beneath the dnshing tide, The trembling fins the boiling wuvo divide : Now hope exalts the fisher’s beating heart, Now, he turns pale, and fears his dubious art; Ho views the trembling fish with longing eyes, While the line stretches with the uuwicldly prize; Each motion humors with his steady hands, And one slight hair the mighty bulk commands; Till tired at lust, despoil’d of all his strength, The gamo athwart the stream uufolds his length ; He now, with pleasure, views the gasping prize Gnash his sharp teeth, and roll his blood-shot eyes; Then draws him to the shore, with artful care, And lifts his nostrils in the sickening air; Upon the burden’d stream lies floating lice, Stretches his quivering fins, and gasping dies.” How to Cook a Trout. As the sportsman, after a few hours diversion and toil, often needs a little refreshment, and as a meal of his own providing is generally ate with more zest and satisfaction, he should be possessed of the proper inform- ation, either to prepare, or direct the preparation, of his re- 96 THE TROUT. past. Barker, before spoken of, gives the following approv- ed methods, which will be found sufficiently epicurean to tickle the palate of the most dainty, or to bring iuto requisi tion the talent of a most finished Parisian cook. “We must have one dish of broyled trouts; when the en- trails are taken out. you must cut them across the side ; bein» washed clean, you must take some sweet herbs, thyme, sweet marjoram, and parsley, chopped small, the trouts being cut somewhat thick, and fill the cuts full with the chopped herbs ; then make your gridiron fit to put them on, being well cooled with rough-suet ; then lay the trouts on a charcoal fire, and baste them with fresh butter until you think they are well broyled. The sauce must be butter and vinegar, and the yolk of an egg beaton; then beat it altogether, and put it on the fish for the service. “ Tll ° best dish of stewed fish that ever I heard com- mended of the English, was dressed in this way: first, they were broyled on a charcoal fire, being cut on the sides as fried trouts; then the stew-pan was taken, and set on a chafing-dish of coles ; there was put into the stew-pan half a pound of sweet butter, one pennyworth of beaten cinnamon, a little vinegar ; when all was melted, the fish was put into the pan, and covered with a covering-plate, so kept stewing half aii hour ; being turned, then taken out of the stew-pan and dished ; be sure to beat your sauce before you put it on your fish ; then squeeze a lemon on your fish : it was the best dish of fish that ever I heard commended by noblemen and gentlemen. This i3 our English fashion. The Italian, ho stews upon a chafing-dish of coles, with white wine, cloves, and mace, nutmegs sliced, and a little ginger ; you must un- derstand, when this fish is stewed, the same liquor the fish is stewed in must be beaten with some sweet butter and the juice of a lemon before it is dished for the service. i he French doth add to this a slice or two of bacon. THE TROUT, 97 Though I have been no traveller, I may speak of it, for I have been admitted into the most ambassadors' kitchens that have come into England this forty years, and do wait on them still, at the Lord Protector’s charge, iind I am duly paid for it ; sometimes I see slovenly scullions abuse good fish most grossly. “ We must have a trout-pie to eat hot, and another to eat cold: the first thing you must gain must be a peck of the best wheateu flour, two pounds of butter, two quarts of milk, new from the cow, half a dozen of eggs to make the paste. Where I was born there is not a girl of ten years of age, but can make a pie. For one pie, the trouts shall be opened, and the guts taken out, and cleaned, and washed ; seasoned with pepper and salt, then laid in the pie ; half a pound of currants put among the fish, with a pound of sweet butter cut in pieces and set on the fish, so close it up ; when it is baked and come out of the oven, pour into the pie three or four spoonsfull of claret wine, so dish it up and send it to the table. These trouts shall cut close and moist. “ For the other pie, the trouts shall be boyled a little ; it will make the fish rise, and eat more crisp; season them with pepper and salt, and lay them in the pie; you must put more butter in this pie than the other, for this will keep, and must be filled up with butter when it cometh forth of the oven.” A common mode of cooking the trout, is by cutting them, as before directed by Barker, seasoning them well with salt and pepper, dredging them with oat meal or wheat Hour, and frying them in butter. Another method is to cut them in two, sprinkle with a small quantity of Cayenne pepper, a due proportion of salt, and broil them. Of the Artificial Fly, The idea of having flies for every 98 THE TROUT. month in the year, is long since exploded, and although some authors in England still arrange them according to the months, it is found that they cannot be depended upon as a certainty. Walton, one of the first authors who arranged them in this manner, in his preface has these remarks : That whereas it is said by many, that in fly-fishing for trout, the Angler must observe his twelve several flies for the twelve months of the year ; I say, lie that fidlows that rule shall be as sure to catch fish, and be as wise as ho that makes hay by the fair days in an almanac, and no surer ; for those very flies that used to appear about and on the water in one month of the year, may, the following year, come almost a month sooner or later, as the same year proves colder or hotter ; but for the generality, three or four flies, neatly and rightly made, and not too big, serve for a trout in most rivers all tho sum- mer ; and for winter, fly-fishing is as useful as an almanac out of date.” Barker gives his instructions in his favorite vein, thus : “ A brother of tho angle must always bo sped With threo black Palmers, and also throe red ; And all made with hackles. In a cloudy day Or in windy weather, angle you may. “ But morning and evening, if the day be bright ; And the chief point of all is to keep out of sight. 4 In tho month of May, none but the May-fly, For every mouth one,’ is a pitiful lie. 44 Tho hawthorn-fly must be vory small ; And tho sandy hog’s-hair is, sure, best of all (For the mallard-wing May-fly, and peacock’s traiu, Win look like tho flesh-fly) to kill trout amain. “ The oak-fly* is good if it have a brown wing, So is tho grasshoppor, that in July doth sing; * Tho oak-fly is also known in F.nglund by tho ndmos of tho ash-Hf» the woodcock fly, and the cannon, or downhill-fly. I THE TROUT. 99 With a grecu body make him, on a middle sized hook, But when you have catch’d fish, then play the good cook. “ Once more, my good brother, I’ll speak in thy car ; Hog’s, red cow’s, and bear’s wool to float best appear ; And so doth your fur, if it rightly fall ; But always remember, make two, and mhko all.*' ft would be equally absurd to name any precise descrip- tion of fly for any particular month in this country, and per- haps more so, as our weather is more changeable than that of any part of Europe. There are many kinds of flies used both here and in Eng- land, but two descriptions have the preference, and accom- pany all Anglers as the universal fly, and are consequently necessary requisites to a well arranged Fly-Angler’s estab- lishment. The Red Hackle, or Soldier Palmer , and the Black Hackle , or Black Palmer , are “ the Flics.” They are both made in a variety of ways, with different colored bodies, but with the same kind of hackle or legs. The most killing kind of the red hackle is made with a red worsted or mohair body, wound arouud with gold twist. The black hackle is used more particularly in very bright days, when the sun shines unobscured by clouds. I.t is made with black worsted body, and a black cock’s hackle for legs ; the body is some- times wound with silver twist, which iu many streams, at pertain times, offers additional attractions to the dainty sub- ject of our discourse. They are both made in various ways and of various sizes, and are known under different numes. The body of the red hackle is sometimes made with crimson, black, yellow, green, and various other hues of worsted, for bodies; the black, also, with red, white, green, and other colors intermingled. They are also made under different names with and without wings. The White Hackle . or Miller, is a good fly in dark, low- ering days. It is made with a white worsted body, and 100 THE TROUT. white dog’s hair for legs, and is sometimes varied with a dark colored or gold twist ; also, sometimes with wings and some- times without. The Green Drake is also considered a good fly in some streams. It is made with a yellow floss silk or worsted body, wound with a red or ginger hackle for legs, and dark yellow or light green parrot feather for wings. As there are no particular names given to the different varieties of flies with us, the following list from Holland, will be of assistance to the American fly-fisher, in making up his book of flies. The Chantrcy. It takes its name from being a favorite of Sir Francis Chantrey, the celebrated sculptor. Body, copper-colored peacock’s herl, ribbed with gold twist; legs, a black hackle ; wings, partridge or brown hen’s feather, or pheasant’s tail. Hook No. 9 or 10. Hojland’s Fancy. Body, reddish, dark brown silk ; legs, red hackle ; wings, woodcock’s wing ; tail, two or three strands of red hackle. Hook No. 10. March Brown , also called the Dun Drake. Body, fur of the hare’s car, ribbed with olive silk ; legs, partridge hackle; wings, tail feather of the partridge; tail, two or three strands of the partridge hackle. Hook No. 8 or 9. Blue Dun. Body, dubbed with water-rat’s fur, and rib- bed with yellow silk ; legs, a duu hen’s hackle ; wings from the feather of the starling’s wing ; tail, two strands of a griz- zle cock’s hackle. Hook No. 10. Carshalton. Body, black silk, ribbed with silver twist; legs, a dark grizzle hackle ; wings, the dark feather of the starling's wing, made spare and short. TIook No. 10. Carshalton Cocktail. A dun fly. Body, light blue fur; legs, dark dun hackle ; wings, the inside feather of a teal’s wing ; tail, two fibres of a white cock’s hackle. Hook No. 9 or 10. THE TROUT. 101 The Pale Yellow Dun. A very killing fly. Body, yellow mohair, or marlin’s pale yellow fur, tied with yellow silk ; wings, the lightest part of a feather from a young starling’s wing. Hook No. 12. The Orange Dun. Body, red squirrel’s fur, ribbed with gold thread ; legs, red hackle ; wings from the starling’s wing ; tail, two fibres of red cock’s hackle. Hook No. 9. The Coachman. Body, copper-colored peacock’s herl; legs, red hackle; wings, from landrail. Hook No. 8. Coio-Dung Fly. Useful chiefly in dark, windy weather. Body, dull lemon colored mohair ; legs, red hackle ; wings, from feathers of the landrail or starling’s wiug. Hook No. 8 or 9. The Hare's Ear Dun. Body, the fur of the hare’s ear ; wings, the feather from a starling’s whig ; tail, two fibres of the brown feather of a starling’s wing. Hook No. 10, some- times dressed without the wisk or tail. Edmonson' s Welsh Fly. Body, dull orange mohair ; legs, the back feather of a partridge ; wings, the feathers from a woodcock’s wing, or the tail of a hen grouse. Hook No. 8. The Kingdom or Kindon. Body, pale yellow silk, rib- bed with crimson silk ; legs, black hackle ; wings, the feather of a woodcock’s wing. Hook No. 9. Brown Shiner. This is a hackle fly. Body, peacock’s herl, twisted spare, with a grouse hackle over it. Gravel or Spider-fly. Body, water-rat’s fur ; legs, black hackle ; wings, the feather from the rump of a partridge. Also made with a dark dun hackle. Hook No. 10 or 11. The Iron Blue. Body, the fur of the water-rat; legs, a light dun hackle ; wings, the tail feather of a tom-tit. or of an American robin. The Great Red Spinner , may be used as an evening fly during the whole summer season. Body, hog’s wool, red 102 THE TROUT. and brown, mixed with gold twist ; legs, bright red cock’s hackle ; wings, the light feather of the starling’s wing ; tail, three strands of a red cock’s hackle. Hook No. 7. Black Gnat. Body, black hackle, or ostrich herl, tied with black silk ; wings, the feather from a starling’s wing. Hook No. 13. Wren Tail. An excellent killer in small bright streams, is always dressed as a hackle fly. Body, dark orange silk, with wings and legs of a wren’s tail. Although the feathers of a wren’s tail cannot bo properly called hackles, they are here used as such, and this remark will apply to other feath- ers similarly employed. Hook No. 12. The Bracken Clock. A kind of beetle. Body, peacock’s herl, dressed full, and tied with purple silk; wings, feather of a pheasant’s breast. Hook No. 9 or 10. Red Ant, in imitation of the small red ant. Body, pea- cock’s herl, made full at the tail, and spare toward the head; legs, red or ginger cock’s hackle; wings, from the light feather of the starling’s wing. Hook No. 9 or 10. By sub- stituting ostrich herl for peacock’s herl, and a black hacklo instead of a red one, the black ant may be imitated. The Sand Fly. Body, the fur from a hare’s neck twisted round silk of the same color; legs, a ginger hen’s hackle; wings, the feather from the landrail’s wing. Hook No. 9. The Stone Fly. One of the larger kind of flics used in windy weather. Body, fur of the hare’s ear, mixed with brown and yellow mohair, and ribbed with yellow silk, the yellow color towards the tail; legs, a brownish red hackle; wings, the dark feather of the mallard’s wing ; tail, two or three fibres of the mottled feather of the partridge. Hook No. 6. Alder Fly. Body, peacock’s herl, tied with dark brown 6ilk ; legs, coch-a-bonddu hackle; wings, the brown speckled feather of a mallard’s back. Hook No. 8. Sometimes dress- THE TROUT. 103 ed on a No. 6 or 7 hook, and winged with the red rump feather of a pheasant, when it is found excellent as a lake fly. Green Drake. Body, yellow floss silk, ribbed with brown silk, the extreme head and tail coppery peacock’s lierl ; legs, a red or ginger hackle; wings, the mottled wing of the mallard, stained olive ; tail or whisk, three hairs from a rab- bit’s whiskers. Hook No. 6. The natural fly appears in May and June, in such vast numbers that the trout become glutted with them, and grow fat upon their good living. Sometimes preferred dressed on a No. 4 or 5 hook. Grey Drake. Body, white floss silk, ribbed with dark brown or mulberry colored silk ; head, and top of the tail, peacock’s herl ; legs, a grizzle cock’s hackle ; wings, a mal- lard’s mottled feather, made to stand upright; tail, three whiskers of a rabbit. The Black Palmer. This is a standard fly, and its merits are too well known to need a description. It is a valuable drop-fly in dark, rainy, or windy weather, and in full water. Body, ostrich’s herl, ribbed with silver twist, and a black cock’s hackle over all. The Soldier Palmer. This fly, and its varieties, may be considered the most general fly on the list, and mauy An- glers never fit up a fly-book without having a red hackle of some kind for a drop-fly. The one given as a specimen may be used with success for large trout, and a strong water ; but for a blight stream a smaller hook must be adopted, and the fly must be more spare of hackle ; and, should the water bo very clear, the gold twist had better be omitted, and a spare hackle be tied with red twist; another variety, is the using a black hackle for the head of the fly, body red mohair, or squirrel’s fur, ribbed with gold twist, and red cock’s hackle over all. The Governor. Body, coppery colored peacock’s herl, nbbed with gold twist, tipped with scarlet twist ; legs, red 104 THE TROUT. or ginger hackle ; wings, the light part of a pheasant’s wing. Hook No. 9. Coch-a-bonddu. This fly is a well known favorite throughout the United Kingdom, though not always under the same name. The cock that furnishes the peculiarly mixed deep and red black feather, necessary to make this fly, is in great estimation. Body, peacock’s herl ; legs and wings, red and black, or coch-a-bonddu hackle. Hook No. 8 or 9. For clear streams it is dressed on a No. 12 hook. The Yellow Sally. Body, pale yellow fur, or mohair, ribbed with fawn colored silk ; legs, a ginger hackle ; wings, a white hackle, died yellow. Ilook No. 9. Ginger Haclclc. Body, short and spare, of yellow silk; legs a.ud wings, a ginger hackle. Hook No. 8. Grouse Hackle. Body, varied to the water and season, 6uch as peacock’s herl, orange silk, &c. ; legs and wings, a grouse hackle. Hook from No. 8 to 12. The Dottcril Hackle. Body made of yellow silk; legs and wings from the feather of a dotteril. Hook from No. 6 to 12. This is an excellent fly, and in the north parts of England considered superior even to the red hackle. The Water Cricket. Body, orange floss silk, tied on with black silk; legs, are made best with peacock’s topping; if this cannot be easily procured, a black cock’s hackle will answer the purpose. Either of these must be wound all down the body, and the fibres then snapped off. The Blue-Bottle Fly. Body, dark blue floss silk, tied with brown silk; legs, a cock’s black hackle; wings, feather of the starling’s wing. Hook No. 9 to 12.” Common House-Fly. Body, ostrich herl, rather full ; legs, a black hackle ; wings, the feather of the starling’s wing. * The sizes of hooks used by Ilofland are entirely too small for the majority of our streams. Where a hook No. 9 or 10 is recommended, No. 4 or 5 should bo used. Those spoken of by Blaine uro more suitublo. THE TROUT. 105 The following night, and other flies, are from Blaine : The Mealy White Moth. Upper wings, the dappled light feather of the mallard, or any very light clear colored feather; under wings, the soft mealy feather of a white owl, or in de- fault, any soft white feather ; body, white rabbit's fur or white ostrich herl, dressed full, and exhibiting a brown head; legs, a white cock’s hackle, carried two or three turns only behind the wings. Hook No. 3, 4 or 5. 1 The Mealy Brown Moth. Upper wings, the dappled feather of a mallard, dyed a reddish brown; under wings, the soft feather of a brown owl, or a soft reddish feather or two from the landrail ; body, any soft brown fur, as of the hare, brown hog’s down, bear’s fur, and the nearest the shade is to tan the better, to be dressed moderately full and long; legs, a brown cock’s hackle, carried one turn beyond that of the preceding fly. Hook No. 3, 4 or 5. The Mealy Cream, Moth. Upper wings, the cream color- ed feather of the gray owl ; under wings, the soft feathers of the same a shade lighter; body, any dubbing or fur of a cream color; legs, a ginger hackle, wrapped three times. Hook No. 4, 5, or 6. The Evening White- Winged Harl Fly. Wings, of a white fowl’s feather; body, peacock’s herl, dressed full and short; legs, a very minute portion of red hackle. Hook No. 5, 6, 7, or 8. The Humble Bee. Wings, of the cock black-bird, to lie flat; body, fore part dubbed with black glossy mohair or fur; hinder part of a deep orange; legs, dress two-thirds of the body with a brown hackle. Hook No. 3 or 4. The Large Blow , or Flesh-Fly. Wings, any transparent looking feather, to be dressed flat ; body, dubbed with black bear’s fur, and a very small portion of glossy purple mohair with it, tied with silk of the same. Dress the body full, and pick out the dubbing to make it look rough ; legs, a very dark 106 THE TROUT. brown or black hackle, dressed two turns only behind the wings. The Hazle Fly , or Lady Bird , crustaceous wings. A small stumpy portion of the red feather of a partridge’s tail or landrail’s wing, to be dressed extended; under wing, transparent looking feather of a hen black-bird, rather longer than the former, to be dressed thin, and rather less extended; body, dubbed thick and round with dark purple mohair, and a small quantity of brown fur intermingled, which, when picked out, form the legs. Hook No. 7 or 8. The Orl Fly. Wings, a brown hen’s or a landrails rud- dy feather, to be dressed long and close to the back ; body, ribbed alternately with dark brown and orange dubbing, add- ing antennae, or horns; legs, a grizzle cock’s hackle. Hook No. 6 or 7. Cinnamon Fly , or Fetid Light Brown. Wings of a ruddy cream color, from the feather of the landrail, or any other of a flame color, to be dressed long, large, and flat; body, seal’s fur of the natural hue; legs, a reddish brown hackle. Hook No. G. There are many other flies not enumerated in the fore- going lists, which the trout will occasionally fancy. On this subject, Blaine says : “ The number of artificial flies required for the practice of fly-fishing, is very differently estimated by different wri- ters. The angling patriarch Walton, gives a list of twelve ‘ reasonable flies,’ which his friend Cotton judiciously dou- bled. The experience of a century and a half has since greatly increased the list, as more extended observation proved the universality of appetite in fish for the insect race. It appeal’s, therefore, strangely extraordinary to find a writer of such credit as Salter, contracting the required numbers into the confined limits of Red and Black Palmers, Red and Black Hackles, Ant-flies, the May-fly, Stone-fly, Gnats, a Red THE TROUT. 107 Spinner, and a Moth ! A fly-book 60 furnished, might secure a medley of roach, dace, chub, and a few unhappy trout, which had strayed out of bounds ; but the exhibition of both bait and fish would not be very creditable to the professed fly-fisher. We have no doubt that many of the flies which the books of some excellent Anglers contain, are seldom called into action ; but as they are when collected not very cumbrous in carriage, eat and drink nothing, and may now and then suit the ‘ lucky occasion,’ we see no disadvantage, but approve the judgment of those Anglers in being furnished with them. In our own fishing practice, we have met with numerous gratifying proofs of the benefit of an ample store ; but infinitely more have we felt the benefit arising from our ability to increase our stock from our own resources, when- ever we found occasion so to do. Many of the flies mentioned will be found useful to the Angler in this country. They may be had at the regular tackle stores, can be made to order, or procured from England. Some difficulty may arise should the sportsman wish to make his own Hies, in procuring the exact feathers and materials as described, but similar feathers can bo taken from many of our birds, or can bo dyed the same colors, which will answer every purpose. Although flies of every description can be procured in the principal cities, there are many in distant parts of the country who will not be able to procure them at all. Besides, the most skilful fisher may have the misfortune to lose his best flies at the beginning of a day s sport, and it would be well, therefore, for every brother of this branch of angling to be always ready with his materials and his knowledge for mak- ing the artificial fly. In fact, it is the practice of many An- glers, always to examine the waters and shake the boughs of the trees, to procure the lutest insect that will most probably 108 THE T It O U T . fall a prey to the voracious trout, and imitate nature’s handi- work on the spot. Gay, the celebrated poet, who was a great proficient in fly-fishing, in his “ Rural Sports,*’ gives the following beauti- ful description of fly-making : “ He shakes the boughs that on the margin grow, Which o’er the stream a waving forest throw, When, if an insect fall, (his certain guide,) He gently takes him from the whirling tide, Examines well his form with curious eyes, His gaudy vest, his wings, his horns, his size ; Then round the hook the chosen fur he winds, And on the back a speckled feather binds ; So just the colors shino in ovory part. That nature seems to live again in art.” And also — ” To frame the little animal provide All the gay hues that wait on female pride : Let nature guide thoe ; sometimes golden wiro Tho shining bellies of the fly roquiro ; The peacock's plumes thy tackle must not fail, Nor the dear purchase of the sable’s tail ; Each gaudy bird some slender tribute brings, And leuds tho glowing insect proper wings; Silks of all colors must their aid impart, And every fur promote the fisher’s art : So the gay lady, with expensive care, Borrows the pride of land, of sen, of air; Furs, pearls, and plumes, the glittcriug thing displays, Huzzies our eyes, and ousy hearts betrays.” The following different directions, by various authors, will enable the reader to select a method suited to his own taste, by which with a little practice and perseverance, he can THE TROUT. 109 succeed in forming flies suitable for his different fishing- grounds, with very little trouble. How to make the Artificial Winged Fly. — (Hofland.) — 11 There are several modes adopted in making the artificial fly ; one is, to tie the wings on the hook, in the natural posi- tion, in the first instance ; another method is, to place the feathers for the wings in a reverse position, in the first in- stance, and naturally afterwards; and the third and last way, is to tio the wings on the hook, after the body is made, instead of beginning the fly with them. " The most expeditious way of completing a number of flies, is to have every necessary material arranged immediately under your eye, and every article separate and distinct ; all the hooks, gut, or hair, wings, hackle, dubbing, silk, and wax, ready assorted and prepared for instant use. The hooks re- quire to be sized for your different flies; tho gut requires the most careful examination and adjustment; tho hackles have to be stripped, and the dubbing to be well mixed ; the silk assorted, and to be of the finest texture ; and the wings to bo tied the length of the hook they are to be fastened to, in or- der that the fibres of the feather may be all brought into the small compass of the hook. This previous trouble not only saves time, but insures a degree of neatness that is otherwise almost unattainable. “ Tho tying of tho wings is thus performed : a piece of well waxed silk is laid in a noose on the fore-finger of the left band, tho wings or feathers are put on the under part of the noose, and at tho distance of the length of tho wing required ; the thumb is then applied closely to the feather, and with one end of the nooso in the mouth and the other in the right hand, tho noose is drawn quite tight, and the silk is then cut within an inch of the knot, to leave a handle by which to hold the wing. If the thumb is not closely pressed, the feathers will be pulled away. 110 THR TROUT. il First Method — How to make the Fly with the Wings in the natural position in the first instance. Hold the hook by the bend, with the point downwards, between the fore-finger and thumb of the left hand; with your waxed silk in your right hand, give one or two turns round the bare hook, about midway ; lay the end of the gut along the upper side of the hook, (if tied on the under side, the fly will not swim true, but continually revolve,) wrap the silk firmly until you get within a few turns of the top ; you then take the wings, lay them along the shank with the right hand, and hold them firmly in their place to the hook with the left hand. Next, tie the feather tightly at the point of contact, with two or three turns ; cut off the superfluous ends of the feather, and tying the head of the fly very firmly, you carry the silk around the gut beyond the head, that the end of the hook may not chafe, or cut away the gut ; then retrace the silk, until you come to the tying on of the wings. Divide the wings equally, and carry the silk through the division alternately, two or three times, to keep the wings distinct from each other. Now prepare the hackle, by drawing back the fibres, and by hav- ing two or three less on the butt, on the side of the feather that comes next the hook, that it may revolve without twist- ing away. Tie the butt-end of the hackle close to the wings, having its upper or dark side to the head of the fly. The Scotch reverse this, and tie the hackle with its under side to the head ; and likewise strip tho fibres entirely oft' that side which touches tho hook. Take the dubbing between the fore-finger a2id tho thumb of the right hand, twist it very thinly about your silk, and carry it around the hook as far as you intend the hackle or legs to bo carried, and hold it be- tween the fore-finger and thumb of the left hand, or fasten it. Then, with your plyers, carry the hackle around your hook, close under the wings, and down to where you have brought your silk and dubbing, then continue to finish your body, by THE TROUT. Ill carrying over the end of the hackle; and when you have mode the body of sufficient length, fasten off by bringing the silk twice or thrice loosely around the hook, and passing the end through the coils, to make all tight. “ Some finish the body of this fly thus : — when the hackle is fastened, after it has made the legs of the fly, the bare silk is carried to the end of the intended body ; dubbing ia then carried up to the legs and there fastened. “ Second Method. This manner of proceeding differs from the first in fixing on of the wings. When you have fastened the gut and hook together, to the point where the wings are to be tied, apply the wings to the hook, with the butt of the feather lying uppermost; when the wings are well fastened, pull them back into their natural position; and when the head of the fly is finished, pass the silk alternately through the wings ; and, having your silk well tied to the roots of the wings, (and not over tho roots,) the fly is to be completed, as in the first method, having cut off the roots of the feather.” How to make the Hackle or Palmer Fly. — (Rennie.)— 11 Hold your hook in a horizontal position, with tho shank downwards, and the bent of it between the fore-finger and thumb of your loft hand ; and having a fine bristle, or strand of silk-worm gut, and other materials, lying by you, take half a yard of red marking silk, well waxed, and with your right hand give *it four or five turns about the shank of the hook, inclining the turns to the right hand ; when you are near the shank, turn it into such a loop as you are hereafter directed to make for fastening oft', and draw it tight, leaving the ends of tho silk to hang down at each end of the hook. Having singed the end of your bristle, lay the same along the inside of the shank of the hook, as low as tho bent, and whip four or five times round ; then singing the other end of the bristle to a fit length, turn it over to the back of tho sbauk, and, 112 THE TROUT. pinching it into a proper form, whip down and fasten off as before directed, which will bring both ends of the silk into the bent. After you have waxed your silk again, take three or four strands of ostrich feather, and holding them and the bent of your hook as at first directed, the feathers to your left hand and the roots in tlio bent of your hook, with that end of the silk which you have just now waxed, whip them three or four times round and fasten off ; then turning the feathers to the right, and twisting them and the silk with your fore- finger and thumb, wind them round the shank of the hook, still supplying the short strands with new ones, as they fail, till you como to the end and fasten off. When you have so done, clip off the ends of the feathers and trim the body of the palmer small at the extremity, and full in the middle, and wax both ends of your silk, which are now divided, and lie at either end of the hook. “ Lay your work by you ; and taking a strong bold hackle, with fibres about half an inch long, straighten the stem care- fully, and holding the small end between the fore-finger and thumb of your left hand, with thoso of the right stroke the fibres iho contrary way to that which they naturally lie; and taking the hook, and holding it as before, lay the hackle into the bent of the hook, with the hollow (which is the palest) side upwards, and whip it very fast to its place ; in doing whereof, be careful not to tie in many of the fibres; or if you should chance to do so, pick them out with the point of a very large needle. lt When the hackle is thus made fast, the utmost care and nicety is necessary in winding it on ; for if you fail in this, your fly is spoiled, and you must begin all again : to prevent which, keeping the hollow or pale side to your left hand, and as much as possible the side of the stem down on the dubbing) wind the hackle twice round; and holding fast what you have 60 wound, pick out the loose fibres which you may havo THE TUOUT. 113 taken in, and make another turn; then lay hold of the hackle with the third and fourth fingers of your left hand, with which you may extend it while you disengage the loose fibres as before. “ In tliis manner proceed till you come within an eighth of an mch of the end of the shank, where you will find an end of silk hanging, and by which time you will find the fibres at the great end of the hackle something discomposed; clip these oft’ close to the stem, and with the end of your mid- dle finger press the stem close to the hook, while with the fore-finger of your right hand, you turn the silk into a loop ; which when you have twice put over the end of the shank of the hook, loop and all, your work is safe. “ Then wax that end of the silk which you now used, and turn it over as before, till you have taken up nearly all that remained of the hook, observing to lay the turns neatly side by side; and lastly clip off the ends of the silk.” On making the Palmer or Hackle-Fly, with the cock’s or lien’s feathers, Holland remarks, “ is simply as described in the fore-named methods, (pages 110 and 111,) by twisting on the legs and body, taking care that the hackle has fibres as long as, or rather longer than, the hook it is to be twisted upon. “ But in making hackle-flies with birds’ feathers, such as those of the snipe, dotteril, dec., the feather is prepared by Stripping off the superfluous parts at the butt-end, then draw- ing back a sufficient quantity of fibre to make the fly ; take the feather by the root and point, with both hands, (having its outside uppermost,) and put the whole of the fibres into your mouth, and wet them, that they adhere together back to back. When the gut is fastened to the hook, you must tie on the feather near to the head of the hook, and the feather tnay be tied either at the butt-end or point ; then twist the feather twice or thrico round the hook, and fasten it by one 114 THE TROUT. or more loops ; the fibres of the feather will then lie the re- verse way, cut oft' the superfluous part of the feather, that remains after tyiug, and twist on the body of the required length ; fasten by two loops, draw down the fibres of the feather to the bend, and the fly is finished. “ If tinsel, or gold and silver twist be required for the body of the fly, it must be tied on after the hackle, but car- ried round the body before the hackle makes the legs. If the tinsel be required only at the tail of the fly, it must be tied on immediately after the gut and hook are put together; the hackle next, and then the body, &c. “ The choice of your fly must depend much upon the na- ture of the water you fish in, and the state of the weather; if the water be full, and somewhat colored, your flies may be of the larger and darker kind ; if, on the contrary, the water should bo low and clear, and the day bright, your fly should be dressed accordingly, i. c. t it should bo pale in color and spare in the dressing.” Of the different Feathers spoken of. A very good imita- tion of the starling’s wing, which is a plain pale grey, can be taken from the wing of a duck, and also from the wing and tail of the black-bird. The mallard’s wing, which is a light grey feather, with black specks, can be nearly imitated by the feather taken from the wing and shoulder of the common drake, and also by some of the light colored feathers of the game-hen. A similar to the landrail, which is a palish brown, can be supplied from the woodcock or pheasant. The cocb- a-bonddu feather is neither more nor less than the black and red feather of the cock. CHAPTER VII. OP THE PIKE JACK, TICKEREL OR MUSCALINGA. This, with the Trout, may be considered the universal fish of the world. It appears to inhabit the inland waters of all northern countries. We read of them as far back as the days of ancient Rome ; and they have been known in Ger- many and Poland from time immemorial. A late writer on Natural History in England, says that they were introduced into that country in the year 1537, and that they were sold lor double the price of a lamb ; but the lady writer on angling, Dame J ulianna Berners, who lived and wrote some time be- fore the aboveinentioned year, (149C,) gives the following in- structions fur taking him, which rather tends to a different con- clusion as to the period in which they were brought to that country. “ Take a codlynge hoke; and take a roclie, or a fresshe heeryng; and a wyre with an hole in the ende, and put it in ut the mouth and out at the taylle, down by the ridge of the fresshe heeryng ; and thenne put the lino of your hoke in after, and draw the hoke into the cheke of the fresshe lieer- yug; then put a plumbe of ledo upon your line a yerdo long© 116 THK PIKE, &C. from your hoke, and a flote in mid way betweene ; and cast it in a pytte where the pyke usyth ; and this is the beste and moost surest crafte of takynge the pyke.” In all probability they are natives of Englund as well as other parts of Europe. lie is certainly one of the oldest inhabitants of our own country, as he was well known to the natives, and in some parts is still called by the Indian name of Muscalinga. At all events, he does not need such restrictions for his preservation as were a short time since proposed in the Legislature of the State of New-York, for the protection of carp in the Hudson river. On a debate for the passage of a law to protect some newly imported fish of the carp species, a Mr. Bloss said: “ that he was in favor of a term of naturalization , not over five years, and so he would protect the fishy foreigner, at least for that space of time.” This well-timed joke caused so much merriment and good feeling amongst the members of the House, that the law of protection passed with but little opposition. The pike is also called the Tyrant of the Waters, the Wolf- Fish, and the Fresh Water Shark; and certainly, from his ravenous disposition, he well deserves all these names; and although not quite so voracious as that very peculiar bird, that devoured the boards, shavings, and even the jack-planes and hand-saws of the carpenter employed to fit up its cage, still his masticatory apparatus must be very powerful, and his digestive machinery equally strong, if all that is said of him be true. “ A thousand foes the finny people chase: Nor are they safe from their own kindred race : The Pike, fell tyrant of the liquid plain, With rav'nous waste devours his fellow train.” It is said that ih Germany a mule, while drinking from a pond, was seized at the mouth by a largo pike, and nearly THE PIKE, &.C. 117 drowned, but by the aid of an attendant, the mule succeeded in getting his head above water, and brought the pike on shore, still clinging to his mouth. They have also been known to devour young goslings, rats, and mice, and when placed in ponds with other fish, have sometimes devoured them all. Smith relates the following story, which serves to show the “ruling passion strong in death:” 41 A gentleman was once angling for pike, and succeeded in taking a very large one, at which time he was encountered by a shepherd and his dog. He made the man a present of his fish, and while engaged in clearing his tackle, he saw the dog, who had for some time been expressing ftis satisfaction by the most une- quivocal signs, seat himself unsuspectingly, with his tail at a tempting proximity to the jaws of the pike, which suddenly caught at it. It would be impossible to express the terror of the dog, on finding such an appendage entailed upon him ; he ran in every direction to free himself, but in vain, and at last plunged into the stream as a last resource — but this was equally fruitless. The hair had become so entangled in the fish’s teeth, that it could not release its hold ; accordingly, he struggled over to the opposite side, now above and now be- low the surface. Having landed, the dog made for his mas- ter’s cottage with all haste, where he was at length freed from his uuwilling persecutor ; yet, notwithstanding the fa- tigue the latter had endured, he actually seized and sunk his teeth into a stick which was used to force open his jaws.” They are known to live to a very great age. A Russian with an unpronounceable name,* mokes mention of a pike that lived to the age of ninety years ; and Gesner says, one was taken in a lake in Suabia, Germany, in 1479, having a * As some of our renders may want our authority, and may bo willing to run the risk of breaking their jaws, wo give the name, Rzaczksiii. 118 THE PIKE, &C. ring attached, stating that it had been placed there in the year 1280, making its age 249 years. It weighed 350 pounds. The identical ring is still preserved at Manhcim. On drawing a pool near Newport, (Eng.) one was taken weigh ing 170 pounds. They are said also to grow to a very large size, and to live to a very great age in Persia. “ 1801,” says Blaine, “ a hook, baited with a roach, was set in the manor pond at Toddington, Bedfordshire ; the next morning a large pike was caught, which with difficulty was got out. It appeared that a pike of three and a half pounds weight was first caught, which was afterwards swal- lowed by auother weighing thirteen pounds and a half, aud both were taken. "From the size of the fish which have occasionally been taken from within them, there appears to be hardly any limit to their voracity. One caught in the Iris was found to contain a bar- bel of six pounds, and a chub of more than three : these nine pounds ot food formed nearly a third of his own proper bulk, which was 31 1-2 pounds. The circumstance of two fish of such dimensions being within the animal at one time, is a proof that the calls of appetite in this tribe are of a peculiar kind; they are most imperative but not incessant. The de- sire to fill the stomach is such that no ofial is refused ; animal substances of every kiud, living and dead, are equally well received, and sometimes other matter ; for the clay plummet of the Angler, the clay and bran balls for ground-baiting, when he is in one of his gormandizing moods, are not refused, of which many instances have occurred ; and it is at such times that he dashes at large flies on the water, prompted to it pro- bably by his habits of receiving there mauy savory morsels, in the 6hape of rats, mice, and frogs, ns well as the young of ducks, geese, swans, and other aquatic birds, which ho is kuowu to prey on as readily as fish.” They are found in our streams, ponds, and lakes, from one THE PIKE, Sc C . 119 extremity of the Union to the other, and do not materially differ from the same species in other countries, and, as the Yankee would say, will live as long, eat as much, and grow as large, as in any other place on airth. The largest within recollection was taken in one of our western lakes, and weighed 46 pounds. They increase in size faster than any other fish known. Block, a German author, says, that “ in the first year they grow from eight to ten inches, in the second from twelve to fourteen, and in the third from eighteen to twenty.” They are observed by Walton to be “a solitary, melan- choly, and bold fish ; melancholy because he always swims or rests himself alone, and never swims in shoals or with company, as the roach and dace and most other fish do, and bold because he fears not a shadow, or to see and be seen, as the trout and chub, and all other fish do.” Rather sorry company for any kind of fish would be the pike, according to Rennie, who says that a pike placed in a pond with an abundance of fish, in one year devoured all but one, which was a carp weighing nine pounds, and he had taken a piece out of him. Poor satisfaction would it be for any of the finny tribe to promenade down the stream with this voracious ani- mal, and to have the peculiar satisfaction of being devoured at once without sauco, or perhaps gradually consumed by a piece out of the back or tail at intervals. No amusement, as the song goes, * Like the trout and the salmon, Sitting down playiug a nico daccnt, agreeable, pleasant, sociable gaino of backgammon.’ No wonder they have no company, or are not sociable ; they should stay by themselves and prefer the Angler’s hook, by all means, and keep away from evil associates, that they may “ come smokiug,” according to Barker’s rules, “as a viand 120 THE PIKE, &.C. for the well set appetite of man, instead of the sharpened teeth and unsalable desires of one of their own species.” They generally spawn in the months of March and April, and sometimes, in some parts of the country, as early as February. Their colors, when in good water and under fa- vorable circumstances, are exceedingly beautiful. Smith re- marks that “ during the height of the season, their colors are extremely brilliant, being green, diversified with bright yel- low spots; at the close of the season the green fades to a grayish hue; and the yellow spots becomo faint and in- distinct.” They are fond of still, shady spots, under and near the weed called pickerel-weed, and appear to grow better and larger in ponds and lakes than in swift running streams. In the extreme heat of summer, they are often found near the surface, where they are sometimes taken with a wire noose, attached to a long pole. They are so bold that they will often take a bait after breaking their hold a few minutes previous, and they have been taken in several instances with a number of hooks imbedded in the flesh in the inside of their mouths. In winter, they retreat to the deep holes, and under rocky projections, stumps of trees, roots, &c., from which places by making a hole in the ice, they are readily taken by spear- ing, or with a drop-line with a small live fish for bait. At this season of the year their appearance is 6omewhat changed, •their colors being less brilliant, and their spots of a darker hue. Llaine remarks : 11 The abstinence of the pike and jack is no less singular than their voracity ; during the summer months then* digestive functions are somewhat torpid, which appears a remarkable peculiarity in the pike economy, seeing it must be in inverse ratio to the wants of the fish, for they must be at this time in a state of emaciation from the effects of spawning ; and the circumstance is fortunate, for were the appotite as usual, few young fry could escape ; but during THE PIKE, &C. 121 tho summer they are listless, and affect the surface of the water, where in warm sunny weather they seem to bask in a sleepy state for hours together, and at these times frequently get ensnared by the wire halter of the poacher. It is not a little remarkable, also, that smaller fish appear to be aware when this abstinent state of their foe is on him ; for they who at other times are evidently impressed with an instinctive dread at his presence, are now seen swimming around him with total unconcern. At these periods, no baits, however tempting, can allure him ; but on the contrary, he retreats from every thing of the kind. Windy weather is alone capa- ble of exciting the dormant powers ; and then, if a cool sharp breeze spring up, he may sometimes be tempted to run ; but even then he will rather play with the bait, and may bo seen even sailing about with it across his mouth ; after doing which he commonly ejects it. This inaptitude to receive food with the usual keenness, continues from the time they spawn, until the time of their recovery from tho effects of it; and thus pike and jack fishing are not productive of much sport between March and October, unless an occasional breeze should blow a hungry fit on them ; and it is thus also that when they are attempted between these periods, the experienced fisher often at once commences his practice by snap-tackle. “We are disposed to think that the decreased voracity of these fish during the heats of summer, is in some measure likewise influenced by the increase of temperature. This animal thrives best in frigid climes, and the further wo pro- ceed within certain limits, the larger is his growth ; thus, in tile Canadian lakes he exists in vast numbers, and grows to the length of four or five feet ; and he does the same in tho cold waters of Lapland, also disappearing, according to Wal- henburg, in geographical distribution with the spruce fir. It is no wonder, therefore, that only a slight approximation 122 THE PIKE, & C. to the equator should unnerve his powers, particularly during the summer heats.” In this country, generally speaking, except in the more southern parts, the habits of the pike, although very similar, are not quite so indolent as they are in England* In the northern parts of the States of New-York and Pennsylvania, and the more northern states, where the climate is colder than that mentioned by Blaine, they are frequently taken in fino condition, and with the usual quantity of sport, in the months of August and September. Generally speaking, the months of September and October are found to be the best months, and in many parts of the country, afford the Angler as much true enjoyment and diversion, as any other of the numerous inodes of piscatorial amusement. The streams and ponds containing them are abundant, and furnish immense quantities. There is perhaps more angling for the pike than for any other of the finny tribe, insomuch that it is almost impossible to mention a section of the country, except within some of our more southern states, which do not furnish fine grounds for the pike, from the moderate sizo contained in the ponds, to the essex or muscalinga of our western lakes. The most common mode of taking them in the ponds and lakes, is with a stiff rod of ash or bamboo, about 12 feet long, accompanied with a reel containing from 50 to 100 yards of strong flax or grass line, with a small fish, or the leg or hinder part of a frog for bait. The hook, which should be a Limerick or Kirby salmon, from No. 0 to 5, according to the size of your game, is attached to strong gimp or wire, from 12 to 24 inches long, for spring and autumn fishing, and for summer fishing, if the pike are shy, strong twisted gut i9 preferable. In stream fishing, the addition of a swivel sinker and a cork or hollow float, will be found necessary. Of the Rod , Blaine remarks : “ Mr. Nobbs, with more THE PIKE, &.C. 123 truth than good taste, has observed, that if your hook and line be good, you may make shift with an indifferent rod; and he seems to ridicule ‘ those precise craftsmen who spend their time in admiring their instruments; * for he adds, that he has ‘often put a ring on his walking-stick, and with his line thus mounted, has killed his pike ; ’ and no one doubts him. We have also heard a boy discourse sweet music on a jew’s-harp; and yet, somehow, jews ’-harps have not super- seded the use of the violin, which is passing strange ! “ We shall not, however, have much difficulty in persuad- ing the true Angler that an appropriate rod will not only add to the success of his practice, but will render that practice more convenient and agreeable than otherwise. It will cer- tainly be more professionally characteristic. In the rod or rods used for jack fishing, the method to be employed, the nature of the water, and the probable size of the fish, are idl matters necessary to be taken into account. In live-bait fishing, and in trolling, a rod of nearly similar length and di- mensions is required ; but in snap-fishing, one of greater strength but diminished length is generally employed. In a very wide water, considerable length of rod is necessary for the purpose of reaching the probable haunts of the fish, and making a cast over the reeds or sedges which frequently skirt the banks and edges of some waters. Without a rod of con- siderable length, the bait often falls short, and not only misses its object, but gets torn by falling within, instead of without the reeds ; and an opening between weed-beds, (so likely a situation for jack,) either in rivers or lakes, can seldom be reached without a length rod. A proper rod, however, for the intended sport, not only adds to the pleasure of the prac- tice, but likewise to the success of it. Notwithstanding all which, it must be conceded, that in pike and jack fishing, it is more the method of the Angler than the merits of his rod, that is essentially requisite to his sport.” 124 THF. PIKE, Si C. As pike angling has become a favorite practice with many sportsmen, both in this country and Europe, the particular directions, practice, and instructions of the best, will be se- lected for the benefit of those not initiated. The following, from the last mentioned writer, the reader can adapt to his peculiar situation, compared with the localities mentioned. “ The rod or rods, for both live-bait fishing and trolling in the rivers of the southern parts of the kingdom, may be made throughout of bamboo ; but a rod so made must bo composed of the very best possible materials ; in which case, in good hands, it will be fully equal to land any pike that does not exceed eight or ten pounds in weight. But where pike may probably be met with of heavier weight, the butt and top at least, should be of some solid wood ; the former may be of willow,* for lightness, and the latter of any tough, con- densed wood, at the discretion of a good rod maker, sur- mounted with one-third whalebone. “ For the lochs of Scotland, the lakes and meres of Eng- lish counties, known to contain pike from 15 to 20 pounds, or more, in weight, the rod must wholly be formed of solid wood.t But even here wo recommend that the butts be bored, both to lighten, and also to contain one or two spare tops, which it may very well do without weakening it. Every trolling rod should be fitted up with at lea9t one spare top, but it may with still more propriety have two. One should bo made shorter and stronger than * The butts of rods sold at the fishing-tackle stores, arc usually made of maple, and the tops of lance-wood, which is a good arrangement of woods, the former being perfectly strong and solid, and the luttcr tough and pliable; add the bamboo joints, as above described, of a proper taper, and you huvo a rod that cannot bo surpassed for ligbtnos>, strength, and durability. See Article on Rods, page 23. t Well seasoned ash, with a maple butt and lance-wood top, is the best description that cun be used, and is suitable for lake fishing. THE PIKE, .& C . 125 the other, to vary the fishing according to circumstances, and likewise to enable the Angler at a distance from his 6tores, to have recourse to snap-fishing, if ho find the jack dainty ; this purpose may, however, be still more effectually answered by a second top, made wholly of whalebone, and less than half the length of the other. Where the angling mania has possession of a traveller, as it had of ourselves, it is of much importance that an article should be capable of be- ing converted into many purposes. By such a rod as wo have just described, he may troll in every water in the king- dom ; nay, he may extend his fishings to the enormous pike of the Canadian lakes, mailed over with rhomboidal scales, and yet he may not return without a successful run. u Captain Williamson says, that * the spare top of an ordi- nary bottom-rod, which is occasionally employed for jack trolling, should be firm, and not too pliant, so that it will bear a weight of four pounds hung to the hook without breaking. 1 Mr. Salter on this head, says : ‘ I have two tops to my troll- ing rod, which I always carry witH me, in case of breaking one, &c. ; one is made very flexible of wood, and a whale- bone top, about two feet long; to this, for strength and secu- rity, I have a ring in the wood part, as well as the large one at the whalebone top ; this top I always use when trolling with the gorge-bait, or when fishing with live bait; the other top is made wholly of stout whalebone, about one foot long; this I use only when snap-fishing, for which it is well adapted by its superior strength and stiffness.’ “ The length of the rod for live-bait- fishing and trolling, may vary from 15 to 17 feet, according to circumstances ; if its wood and workmanship can be depended upon, 16 feet is in uo case too much ; and where extensive streams are fished over, one of 16 or 18 feet is convenient.” The Rings or Guides for the Line , on a trolling rod, should be much larger than those for salmon or trout, and 126 THE PIKE, AC. wider apart, say from two to three feet from each other. The solid rings, or patent guides, as they are called, and the patent tip or end, should be preferred. The manner of baiting, where a single hook is used, for live or dead bait-fishing, is the same as that before described for trout. The Bottom-Tackle is sometimes fitted up with swivel- traces, which Blaine thus describes: “ The single, is thus made : to about 10 or 12 inches of gimp, add a hook-swivel at one end, and a loop at the other; the hook of the swivel will receive the loop also of the gimp-hook, and the gut loop will receive the reel line by a draw bow-knot, which it will be prudent occasionally to examine, when the reel line used is one either of hair, or silk and hair, as such knots made in them sometimes loosen, but in the plaited silk this never happens. It will be necessary to add three or four swan shots to the trace, or otherwise a dip-lead , * either of which should be fixed just above the swivel. Note here, that it is necessary to add some weight to all the fish-bait beyond their own: the intention of which is, that the increased resistance to the water, made by this means, occasions an increase in the velocity of their spinning, by way of counteraction. “ The Double Swivel-Trace, is made by uniting two 10 inch lengths of gimp by a box-swivel: to one end of this trace, add another swivel of the hook kind, loop the remain ing end, and finish by adding to the trace by way of ballast, either swan-shot or a dip-lead. Note, that in the application of these traces, it may be sometimes more convenient, in stead of making a loop for receiving the hook-loop, to whip tho hook at once to the trace, and this may be more particu- * A sinker, with swivels attached to each end, dispensing with the swivel described, is generally preferred by American Anglers ; and also in tho double swivel-trace, one of the swivels is oftou omitted, and a swivel tinker used instoad. THE PIKE, AC. 127 larly proper when the water is shallow. On this subject, Salter says : 1 In the summer months, when the water gets low and bright, from a continuance of dry weather, I have found, when I used traces made of the choicest twisted gut, instead of gimp, and hooks also tied to twisted gut, that I have killed more jack and pike, either when trolling with the gorge, or live-bait fishing, than I could if I used gimp. This, you are to observe, is only during tho summer, when jack and pike are not much on tho feed, and the water is very bright— -they seem shy of coarse tackle ; but not so in winter and spring, for they are then well on the feed and the water is generally somewhat discolored, at which time and seasons I believe jack and pike would take a baited hook if it was tied to a clothes’ line or rope.” Another mode of taking the pike is by baiting with a small fish on the gorge-hook, which Holland says is “ either a double or single hook, fixed on a twisted brass wire, and loaded on the shank with lead, to which is attached a piece of gimp, eight or ten inches long, at the end of which is a small loop. To bait this hook you must have a brass needle, about seven inches long; put the loop of the gimp in tho eye or small curve of the needle ; then put the point of the needle in at the mouth of the fish, and bring it out at his tail ; bring the gimp and wire along with it, the lead being fixed in the belly of the bait fish, and the hook or hooks lying close to the out- side of the mouth; then turn the points of the hooks towards his eyes, if a double hook, but if a single one, directly in a line with his belly ; next tie the fish’s tail to the arming wire very neatly with a strong thread. To the line on your reel you must attach a gimp trace 24 inches long, having a swivel at each end, and one in the middle. The spring-swivel at the end of your line, is to be hooked on the loop of your baited trace, and you are ready for sport. “ When you are thus prepared, drop in your bait lightly 128 THE PIKE, &C. before you, then cast it on each side, and let the third throw be across the river, or as far as you can reach ; still letting the bait fall lightly on the water. In each cast let your bait fall nearly to the bottom; then draw it up gently towards you, and again let it sink and rise till you draw it out of the water for another cast. “ The further you throw your bait if the water be broad, (provided always that it fall lightly,) the greater your chance of success, so that you are not interrupted by weeds, roots of trees, &c. ; and if the water should be very weedy, you will be compelled to drop your bait into deep clear openings. “ When you feel a run, let your line be perfectly free, and allow the fish to make for his haunt without check ; and when he stops, give out a little slack line ; by your watch givo him ten minutes to pouch the bait before you strike, which you may then do, by first gently drawing in your slack line, and then striking gently ; but should your fish move soon after he has been to his haunt, give him line, and he will stop again ; but, after this, if he move a second time before the ten minutes are expired, strike, and you will most likely secure him ; but if he has only been playing with the bait, you will have lost him. When I have been so served once or twice, I generally resort to my snap-tackle. “ If you have fairly hooked your fish, ho cannot easily break away; and as your tackle is strong, unless he is very large, you need not give out much line, but hold him fast and clear of the weeds, giving him but a short struggle for his life. The gafl is better than a net for landing a large pike, for ho is dangerous to handle, and his bite is much to be dreaded. “ When you are without either gaff or landing-net, seize the fish by putting your finger and thumb into bis eyes.” The pike is sometimes angled for with worms, when the water is clear, and the game runs small. Blaine says: “ Worm-fishing for jack is a species of live-bait angling, THE PIKE, fcC. 129 that we and others have sometimes practised with success, particularly where small jack are numerous, in ditches and dykes, in marshes, &c. In our worm-fishing for jack, we have found the brandling the most successfid of all the varie- ties, and our practice has usually been to employ two at a time on a No. 3 or 4 hook ; we however did not use the common wire hook, but the barbed or stronger kind, by which means the strength was increased, though the appear- ance was not rendered more formidable.' And note, that this kind of hook may be prudently used in all the various me- thods to be detailed, when single hooks of small size are re- quired. Use a Host correspondent to the nature of the water; and if that be moderately deep and at all ruffled, let the lloat he a small sized cork one ; but when the surface is not dis- turbed, use a porcupine’s quill, for the finer the tackle, the greater thj chance of success. Retire as far as possible from the banks, and strike tolerably quick, at leastafter the second tug is felt, by which time the jack has usually got the worm within the throat.” Live-Bait and Snap-Angling. These are favorite modes of sport with many Anglers, but objected to by others on ac- count of the spice of inhumanity with which the practice is tinc- tured, by attaching the live bait to the hook, in anticipation of a bite from the all-devouring jack. It is usually practised in the summer months, when the water is low and clear, and the game requires particular attention. The following methods ofbaiting, from Blaine, are sufficiently compassionate fur the most fastidious member of the Humane or Peace Societies. “ One of the most simple and least painful, is to pass the hook under the back (in, just eveu with the roots of its rays, including a small portion of its skin only, by which means the fish will not be materially injured, and will continue to swim strong, ami show itseli. In this method it has been found that the struggles of the fish, or eveu the Violence of the striking 130 THE PIKE, &C. of a jack, has often forced tho bait from the hook; to prevent which, a thread has been carried round the point of the hook on one side, and being passed under the belly, has been fas- tened to the shank of the other side ; but this deforms the fish, and injures its vitality, it is therefore not an eligible practice : its object may be obtained in a more effectual manner, thus : instead of one, make use of two strong but small hooks, No. 3, 4 or 5, according to the size of the bait; hang each of these to a small piece of strong gut, of three inches in length, and loop each end. Introduce each of these hooks a very little removed from each other, under the dor- sal fin, one on one side, and the other on the other side; this done, if they are critically placed, these two loops will meet so exactly as to be received into tho loop of the trace-lines, without dragging one side more than the other. This me- thod, we can venture to promise, will prevent the escape of the bait, and is, as we believe, much more effective in taking the prey also. “ The Snap-Bait variety is seldom chosen in pike-fishing by preference, but is rather forced on the fisher, in the spring and summer months, when the pike and jack are not much on the alert in taking baits. On the contrary, if one of them does seize a bait at these times, he is apt to pouch or gorge it, but alter roving about with it in his mouth for some time, he ejects, or blows it out, as Anglers term it. Snap- fishing, we may add, intermixes itself with live-bait fishing, and witli trolling also ; or rather, on some occasions wo add a-8uap mode of striking the pike to the other methods ; we have therefore a live-snap and a dead-snap, and nowand then snap-hooks are likewise added to a gorge-hook in trolling, and that with perfect success. In all cases, therefore, if tho bait- hooks are such as can be depended on, and the rod bo suffi- ciently strong, tho methods already described, and such as are to follow, may be lilude snap-fishing, by simply striking THE PIKE, &C. 131 the fish at once, instead of allowing him to take the bait away to his hold ; the principal, and indeed the only difference be- ing, that when we go out with the intent of snap-angling, our hooks are large, and ought to bo strong also, and our rod is strong and short. “ Directions for making a Live Snap-Bait. Take two strong hooks, of size No. 3 or 4, according to the strength of their make, as well as the size of the bait : tie each to about an inch and a quarter of line twisted wire, and again tie these two wires together, including in the tie a hook* No. 8 or 9, and also eight or ten inches of gimp, which loop at the other end: but in the tying, place the large hooks, contrariwise, so that one may poiut towards the head, and the other towards the tail of the bait-fish, which will greatly increase the chance of success when using it. To apply this, enter the small hook under the back fin, and allow one of the two large hooks to apply itself close to one side of the bait, and the other to be similarly placed on the other, but with the direc- tion of their points reversed. We have often, even when the spring-snap has been in our book, made use of this more sim- ple plan in preference, particularly where our only baits were gudgeons. A good sized roach or dace can conceal the snap, but it is hardly applicable in any way to a small fish. u Dead-Bait Spring-Snap. This machine can be applied either to the dead or living bait ; it is, however, we think, more applicable to the former, as it requires a sufficient hold oa the bait to offer a resistance equal to the springing snap, or the benefit is lost : such a hold is injurious to the live bait, and soon destroys it. No bait answers so well for the placing of the spring-snap, as either a roach, bream, t or perch, on * Thcso hooks should bo tied near the top, in a similar position to that on the spring snap-hook, described on plate of hooks. t Any of the small fi&h that inhubit the .stream with tbo pike, will an ■wer the purpose, und be equally acccptublo. 132 THE PIKE, & C . account of the breadtli of their figures ; but to either of these, and to the roach particularly, it can be readily and conve- niently attached. Choose a fresh dead roach, of from three to five ounces ; insert the small hook of the spring as above directed for the common snap, but a little deeper, so as to take a firmer and deeper hold, than when applied to the living one. If the apparatus, from its size, must project beyond the line of the fish form, let it be above ; but by no means allow the bend of the hooks to appear under the ventral surface. The figures Nos. 4 and 5 on Plate No. 2, exhibiting the snap sprung and unsprung, furnish a sufficient exemplification of its mode of action ; in seizing of the bait, the pike or jack draw the hooks out of the detaining frame, and in conse- quence they immediately expand and fix themselves into the jaws of the fish which has seized it. “ Of the Hooks in Snap-Fishing. We must again say, it is of great consequence that those to strike the pike be so placed as to easily clear themselves ; if, therefore, it is ex- pected of these hooks that they shall support and play the fish, and yet be ready at a moment to disengage themselves from this attachment, then too much is expected of them; and when they ought to be free, to strike at once into the mouth of the pike, they are apt to be buried deep in the body of the bait. It was purposely to relieve this strain on the bait that we added to the traces a small hook, which then left the large hooks at liberty to disengage themselves : for on the small hooks the stress of the action of playing the fish, was then altogether placed. It is on this principle that the snap-baits in general should be formed, and where they havo not some sustaining hooks, independent of the snap-hooks, then they ought never to pass through the centre of the body of the bait-fish, but superficially under the skin only, so that when the pike strikes, the skin of the bait may readily tear away by the united forces of the stroke of the Angler and his THE PIKE, &C. 133 prey, the consequence of which is, that the hook or ] looks immediately disengage themselves from the bait, and pene- trating the mouth of the pike, they retain him. “ The Bait being 'properly fxed, cast it lightly into the water, with the line drawn out to two-thirds the length of tho rod, observing to make the first cast in shore , but be as much concealed as possible from view. If success does not follow this, extend the throw further into the water, and to do that with effect, give the impulsive swing of the bait with the same length of line as before, but have in addition a yard or two of loose line in the left hand, which as the bait Hies forward, loosen quickly from the hand, and as it arrives at its destination, drop the point of the rod, which will ease the bait into the water without injury to itself, or alarm to tho pike. The attempts of the live bait to make for the weeds or the shore, must bo counteracted by drawing it back or giving it a new direction, and as it flags in liveliness, stimulate it by shaking the rod a little, which often stimulates the jack also to strike the bait. In drawing up tho bait to remove it to a new situation, observe to do it gently, and at the same time watch the water, for it is not at all uncommon for a jack to follow on its attempted removal. If any thing of this kind is perceived, by no means remove the bait, but lower it again into the water, and begin moving it quickly at a few inches below the surface, backwards and forwards. In all cases, keep the float in sight, but avoid showing yourself if possible, particularly in the summer months, and when the weather and water are both bright. At such a time, to increase your small chance of sport, try to get the sun before you, and the wind behind ; the former you might well dispense with alto- gether, the other will prove your best friend ; but if there be sun, you must at least tuke care that it do not reflect either your own shadow or that of your rod on the water. In the months of February, October and November, this may be of 134 THE PIKJC, ScC. little consequence, but it is otherwise in the spring and sum- mer months. “ Be caref ul not to mistake the motions of the bait for those which are made by the pike or jack when seizing it. With the experienced Angler there is no danger in this, but one less initiated might be apt to fall into the error, particularly as the mere sight of the jack will sometimes make the bait throw himself out of water to avoid his dreaded foe. The proficient at such a time will do nothing more than gently move his bait as though it were going to leave the spot, which alone will sometimes occasion the jack to seize it at once. The seizure of the bait by the pike is marked by the float, which is not thrown up, but on the contrary is drawn violently down, and the water is likewise observed to undulate, unless the bait be seized at a considerable depth. Be prepared for this with a free line as regards the reel ; it is also a good plan to have in the left hand a yard or two of loose line to give out as the pike runs, which is infinitely preferable to al- lowing it to be pulled by the fish himself from the reel; which alone, with a pike not well on the feed, will cause him to reject it. Whatever line, therefore, is required in the pro- gress of the fish to his hold or haunt, veer it out by the hand, and such hold is seldom far off, and he will when there, stop to gorge the bait. li In striking , let not impatience tempt you: wait until you are certain that the pike has actually gorged the bait; otherwise your slight hold on your bait and prey will tear away, and you will lose both at the same effort. The pouch- ing time is by no means definite, but is regulated by circum- stances : thus, having satisfied yourself by the previous still ness of the pike or jack, that he is gorging, and by his again moving out from his retreat (which signal you must look for) that he has actually done so, give your line a smart hand THE PI1CE, tcC. 135 Stroke, which will fix the barbs into the maw beyond the power of ejection.” Trolling for Pike. This method, the last given, is per- haps the best of the series of the different contrivances for taking this species of game. It is generally practised in two ways, by roving of drawing the line from the shore, or by trolling the line gently from a small sail-boat or skiff, with an attendant, to be guided by your directions. With a stiff rod, reel, and other tackle, without a float, as before described, the latter method, with a good ground and large game, is de- cidedly at the top of pike-angling. Whether on shore or in a boat, the manner of proceeding should be the same. Of Bank- Trolling, Blaine, the best authority, has the fol- lowing : '■ The method of holding the rod differs in the prac- tice of different Anglers, some grasp it firmly in the right hand, and depend on the strength of their arm for delivering the bait out to its extent ; but we apprehend that much the better method is that of resting the butt against tho hip, thigh, or stomach, or wherever convenient support can be obtained, (we always use our hip for tho purpose,) by which much ex- ertion is saved, the bait can be cast much wider, mid when the Angler is accustomed to tho habit, he may, by this means, direct it within a few niches of the spot he aims at. The rod placed, and the bait swinging on such a length of liue as can be managed, retain within the left hand a yard of it loose, which as the bait is cast gradually run off the hand, directing it rather slantingly i by such means it will shoot diagonally forward, with a natural appearance impelled by the weight of the lead.* When delivered, begin to move it after the man- tier of the motion, about mid-water, observing always to avoid removing it quickly from the water for another tlirow, for * This is where the leaded gorge-hook is used, tho method of baiting dost adopted in trolling. 136 THE PIKE, tC. both pike mid jack often follow the bait, and seize it at tile moment it rises towards the surface, fearful it is going to throw itself out of the water to avoid the pursuit. “ When you have a run, or in other words, when a pike or jack has scizod your bait, lower the point of the rod to- wards the water, and at the same time draw the line gradu- ally from the reel with the left hand, so that nothing may impede or check the progress of the fish in carrying the bait to its hold in order to pouch it; do not strike until he has had possession of the bait about seven minutos, or till the line shakes or moves in the water, then wind up the slack line, and turn the rod, so that the rcol may be uppermost instead of underneath, then strike, but not with violence.” Taylor offers an excellent practical remark on striking, when he says: “ Tho pike will as soon as he has seized a bait, run to his hold to pouch or swallow it ; allow him there- fore five minutes to do so, (unless the line slackens before that time, which is a signal that he has already done it,) and then strike. But if after ho lias ran off' with the bait, he makes scarcely any stay with it at his hold, but goes off with it again, you should not strike till after he hns rested a second time, allowing him still about five minutes; but if he should run off a third time before tho five minutes are expired, draw a tight line, and strike him instantly.” Captain Williamson observes, that “ when you see a great number of very small bubbles rising from the spot where you know, by tho direction of your line, the jack is lying, you should forbear from striking, it being a certain sign that ho has not pouched your bait.”* “ The pike being struck ,” the first directions continue, * There is much difference of opinion nhout the timo to he given for pouching tho buit, sonio giving iu some cases fiftocu or twenty minutes, and one writer recommends thirty minutes! The most experienced, in particular instances, give ten, and ovon fifteen minutes} but thirty, or THE PIKE, HC. 137 “ if it should be a large fish, and the place open, give more line, and do not pull hard at any time, unless your tackle should be in danger of entangling among weeds or bushes; and when this is the case, the utmost caution is necessary lest the rod, line, hook, or hold, should break. When com- pletely exhausted, and brought to the side, take it up with a net, or fix a lauding-hook in it, either through the upper lip or under jaw ; or, if in want of either of these, put your thumb and finger into its eyes, which is the most safe hold with the hand.” It is also most judiciously remarked by Mr. Salter: “ When you have hooked a jack or pike, and played him till he is quite exhausted, and you are drawing him ashore, make it a rule to float him on his side, and keep the head a little raised above the surface of the water, that the nose or gills may not hang to or catch hold of weeds, &c., while you are thus engaged bringing your prize to the shore ; for some- times you cannot avoid drawing it over or among the weeds; and I have seen a pike touch and get entangled in this way, and before it could be disentangled, it recovered from its ex- haustion or stupor, and occasioned much trouble and hazard before it could again be subdued. “ When a pike has been brought to land, the inexperi- enced should be warned to be careful of his jaws, and to ob- serve that after he appears wholly exhausted, he can yet bite severely. He can also, if he be not immediately stunned, make his way again to the water most artfully, by repented jumps, of which we witnessed a most ludicrous instance. The pike being stunned, it becomes necessary to recover the gorge-hook from the maw. To do this, turn him on his side, and set the hollow of your foot behind his gills ; then with your Bpud wrench open his mouth, and introduce your dis- ®vou twenty minutes, would tiro tlio patience of the most ardent of the followers of Isaac Walton. 138 THE PIKE, Sc C. gorgfer. If the hooks are in the maw, as they usually are under the gorging system, open the fish’s stomach about the middle, aud you will be opposite to or rather under the points, so that your gimp will be safe. Cut away the parts that are hooked, and unslipping the knot that holds the gimp to the reel line, draw your bait, hooks, and gimp, all through the aperture made in the stomach. This will disfigure the fish less than cutting down the jaws, until the hook can be got out through the mouth. It is a good plan in trolling to be provided with two or three sticks of various lengths ; one of these will assist to prop open a jack’s mouth, while the Angler is attempting the extraction of the hook, but by no means trust your fingers in his mouth unless he be gagged.” In addition to the common pike, jack, or pickerel, the fol- lowing notice of different species, by Flint, in his History of the Mississippi Valley, may be interesting to the reader. “ Pike Essex. We have noted many species of pike in the Ohio and Mississippi, and their waters. They are called pike, pickerel, and jack-fish, and perfectly resemble the fish of the same name in the Atlantic waters. The Indians of the Wabash and Illinois call them piccanau. They are of all sizes, from a half to twenty pounds. “ Essex Vittatus , jack-fish, white pickerel. Length sometimes five feet.” The latter appears to be a distinct species. They are very good for tho tabl6, and further as to his angling qualities we aro not informed. Having given the pike a long run through many pages, and over what may appear to the uninitiated the rocks and weeds of instruction, it is to be hoped, notwithstanding, that the subject is sufficiently clear to introduce him to the pot, which shall be done through Mr. Nobbs, an English author, quoted by Hofland. “ IIow to Cook the Pike. Take your pike and open him) THE PIKE, AC . 139 rub him within with salt and claret wine ; save the melt, and a little of the bloody fat ; cut him in two or three pieces, aud put him in when the water boils; put in with him sweet marjoram, savory, thyme or fennel, with a good handful of salt; let them boil nearly half an hour. For the sauce, take sweet butter, anchovies, horse-radish, claret wine, of each a good quantity; a little of the blood, shalet, or garlic, and some lemon sliced; beat them well together, and serve him up.” CHAPTER VIII. OP THE PERCH. This, like the last described, is a bold and voracious fish, and with the pickerel and trout, has his place in the numerous ponds and lakes throughout our country. There are many varieties, the most common of which may be described under tho general heads of Common, Yellow, White, and Black Perch. The Common Perch — (Perea Fluviatillis — Smith.) “ A beautiful fish this, having an olive brown tinge, mingled with a golden hue, together with dark bands transversely coursing the sides. The first dorsal fin is somewhat larger than the second, and marked posteriorly by a particular dark spot All the fins are tinged with a lively red. when first brought out of the water ; the same color is also observed on the under edgo of the gill membrane. ” The Yellow Perch — (Bodianus Flavescens — Mitchill.) “A beautiful fresh water fish of a foot or more in length, and three inches in depth. Heud rather small, and tapering towards the snout. Both jaws roughened with very 6inall teeth. THE PERCH. 141 Eyes large and yellowish. Body deep and thick, but becom- ing slender towards the tail. Scales rather rough and hard. Lateral line almost straight. Tail rather concave. First ven- tral ray spinous; as are also the two first and anal rays, all the rays of the foremost dorsal fin, and the first of the second dorsal. Colors, brown or olive on the back, turning yellow on the sides, anc} white on the belly. Faint brown zones, to the number of four, or more, diversifying the sides from the back to belly. Dorsal and pectoral fins brown. Ventral and anal scarlet. “ In the year 1790, I transported about two dozen of these yellow perch from Rockankama Pond, in Suffolk County, to Success Pond, in Queens. The distance is about 40 miles. Since that time there have been as many of them as could subsist. My assistant in the undertaking, was my uncle Uriah Mitchill, Esq., High Sheriff of Queens County. We filled a large churn with the waters of Rockankama Pond. We put bo few perch into it, that there was no necessity for changing it on the road. Wo were in a wagon, and came the whole distance on a walk, without stopping to refresh either man or horse. The project of transporting the fish to Success Pond was completely answered ; and in this way was the yellow perch carried to Hempstead waters.” The first-mentioned pond furnishes immense quantities of the finest kind of yellow perch, and is the resort of parties of pleasure, and those who are fond of light sport, during the summer season. It is situated in the northwest part of the town of Islip, Long-Island, is a beautiful and picturesque sheet of water, almost lurge enough to deserve the name of a lake ; its shape is nearly circular, the water perfectly clear, and of great depth — so deep in some places that no bottom has been found. The water is said to rise and fall once in seven years. Smith remarks: “ Under favorable circumstances, for in- 142 THE PERCH. stance, in a deep large pond, shaded by a thrifty growth of brushwood on the margin, the yellow perch attains to a large size, and becomes elegant in its proportions.” It is the opinion of a late writer on Natural History, that this fish, and that called the silver perch, is one and the same thing. He says : “ In our humble view, the yellow fins of the silver perch, entitle it to the name and rank of the one before us, (the yellow perch,) and further we believe, they are one and the same thing — the trifling difference in color depending on circumstances. The love and ambition of sub- division — the longing to be the creator of new genera and new species — lias introduced more confusion into works of natural history, than can be expurgated in fifty years of common sense to come.” White Perch — (Bodianus Pallidus — Mitchill.) “ With soft and connected dorsal fins, pale back, and white sides. Length eight inches, depth two and a half. Color whitish, with a dark hue, according to the angle of reflected light. Back, pale; tail even; lateral line extending through it. Small teeth in the lips. Patches of them in the throat. Eyes large and pale. Nostrils double.” Smith gives a similar description, and also has the follow- ing: “ Pond Perch is another common name for the same fish : we cannot discover any kind of difference whatevor.” Black or Red Perch — (Bodianus Rufus — Smith.) “ This is a little lurger than the silver perch, and though denominated red, is really nearly black, after it has done spawning. Oper- culum serrated, the tail slightly forked, and the jaws and swal- low set with fine sharp teeth. Usually the three first rays in the anal are stiff. Very common wherever the others are found.” Flint also mentions a species of this perch peculiar to western waters, and a fine table fish, which he calls Brown Bass. It is called Brown Bass (Lcpomis Fluxuolaris) or Black Perch, and grows from one to two feet in length. THE PERCH. 143 There are many other varieties in the ponds and brooks spread over the length and breadth of the country ; and al- though they do not give as much sport to the Angler in their capture, as the trout and similar descriptions, still they are much sought after, and considered a fine table iish. They generally spawn in the month of March ; and although they may be taken at almost any time, either in winter or summer, they may be had in the largest quantities and in the finest condition, from May to July. The time of day in which the fisher will be most successful in taking them, is from seven until ten in the morning, or from four until dusk in the eve- ning. They are very slow in their growth, though some- times attaining a veiy large size, and multiply very fast. Smith remarks : “ Perhaps there is not another fish, with the exception of the eel, so universally spread over the globe, as the fresh water perch. It is delicate food, and therefore exceedingly valued. From the largest rivers above the influ- ence of tides, to the smallest rills which trickle down the sides of the lofty mountain, the perch is always to be found. They swim swiftly, keeping near the surface, feeding ou flies and minute insects. In the lake of Geneva, a female was caught, from which 992,000 ova were taken. This fact shows very clearly that it is marvellously prolific, yet not ten in a hundred of the ova arrive at maturity, being the food of others. To the Greeks and Romans, this fish was perfectly familiar. 5 * Of English authority, Blaine says : “ The perch is con- sidered slow in its growth; but its increase depends much on the nature of its habitation: in ponds, and other small and perfectly stagnant waters, it grows slowly, and seldom ar- rives at last to any great size or weight ; but in rivers, in es- tuaries, and particularly in such waters as are subject to the rising tide, and as are slightly impregnated with brackish particles, although without current, they grow fast, and be- 144 THE PERCH. come very fat. Of the nof.itia) of large perch, we have be- fore observed on one taken in the Serpentine River, in Hyde Park, which weighed nine pounds, and another of eight pounds, taken in Dagenham Breach, by a Mr. Curtis. In * The Angler’s Sure Guide,’ mention is made of the portrait of one caught near Oxford, which was twenty-nine inches long, and of a proportionate depth ; and supposing such mea- sure to have been correct, the weight must have been very great. “ The perch is gregarious, in the strictest sense of the word : a number herd together by a sort of compact, which confines them to situation, to size, and to habit as well as manner; all fire alike; the same hole contains them, and the same swim maintains them; and if one should be taken, it is the Angler’s own fault if the whole do not share the same fate. This circumstance is remarkable in a fish of prey, since predatory fish in most instances are solitary ; and it is even more singular in one so voracious as to swallow its own eye, as heretofore stated.* The common mode of angling for perch in ponds, is with a light stifi rod, similar to that used in worm-angling for trout, * The following is thocircumstanco alluded to: “ Somo time ago, two young gentlemen of Dumfries, while fishing at Dulswinton Loch, having expended their stock of worms. &c., had recourse to the expedient of picking out the eyes of the dead perch they had taken, and attaching thorn to their hooks — a bait which this fish is known to take us readily as any other. One of the perch cuught in this manner struggled so much when taken out of the water, that the hook had no sooner been loosened from its mouth than it came in contact with one of its own eyes, and ac- tually tore it out. Iu the struggle, the fish slipped through tho holder’s fingers, and again escaped to its native element. The disappointed fisher, still retaining tho eye of the uquatic fugitive, adjusted it on tho hook, aud again committed his line to tho waters. After a vary short interval, on pulling up the line, he was astonished to find the identical perch that had eluded his grasp a few minutes beforo, and which literally perished in swallowing its own eye.” THE PERCH. 145 with a short line, about the length of the rod, a light float, and a small sinker, with a trout hook No. 2. This is not, however, the safest mode ; for although the Angler expects small game, he should be prepared for large; and as the pickerel is a com- mon inhabitant of ponds with the perch, he should always have attached to his rod a reel, to contain from 20 to 50 yards of line, unless, like the negro who was sent by Iris master to catch eels, he mean to take perch, and nothing else. The colored gentleman spoken of was sent by his master to catch a mess of eels for his breakfast. After sitting a long time, and talcing only a few of his favorite fish, he had a severe tug at his line, and with his strong tackle he immediately pulled out a fine three pound bass, but to the astonishment of the bystanders, unhooked him, and threw him overboard, say- ing, “ Massa tell me cotch eels,* The usual bait for the perch, in pond-fishing, is the com- mon ground-worm, which they will take generally if they tako any thing. The brandling, and other worms, are some- times used, as also cheese and bread pastes. For stream- fishing, for large game, in addition to the worm, the minnow, or any similar small fish that delight in the same water; also, the parts of frogs, as in pickerel-fishing; and, when the stream runs into or near salt water, and they can bo procured, the shrimp will be found an excellent bait. They are used in the same manner, and with the same kind of tackle, as in trout and pike-fishing, as before described. For Minnow-Fishing for Perch , Holland gives the follow- ing: “ The minnow may be used by fixing a No. 9 hook under the back fin, or by passing it through his lips, with a cork float, carrying shot according to the depth of the water. You should fish within a few inches of the bottom, and when a fish bites, a little time should be given before you strike, as the perch is tender mouthed, and if not well hooked, is apt to break his hold. 146 THE PERCH. u Some Anglers prefer roving for perch, in the following manner : Use a reel on your rocl, and have bottom tackle of three yards of gut, a hook No. 8 or 9, one or two shot-corns to sink the bait, which should be one or two well scoured red worms ; and you must then cast your line across the stream, letting it sink, and drawing it towards you alternate- ly, until you feel a bite, then allow a few seconds before you strike. You may also drop this bait into a deep still hole, as in trout-fishing ; indeed a practical Angler (especially an old trout-fisher, will prefer this mode of worm-fisliing to the use of the float.” Taylor directs : “ If the Angler roves with a minnow, let it be alive, and the hook stuck in under the 'back fin, or through the upper lip ; let the minuow swim in mid-water, or rather lower; use a cork float, of a size that he cannot sink it under the water, with a few shot, about nine inches from the hook, to keep him down, or when tired he will rise to the surface. When using the frog, put the hook through the skin of its back, and it will swim easier than if the hook was thrust through the skin of its hind legs ; recollect to keep tho bait as far from the shore as possible, for he will constantly be making to it ; always give line enough at a bite to let tho perch gorge. Where pike are suspected to hauut, the hook should be attached to gimp, as in this way of fishing they will take the bait as well as the perch.” For taking the perch, some Anglers affix the bait by two hooks, one inserted at the root of tho back fin, and tho other attached to either the gill, lip, or nostril. We think this by no means a bad plan ; but on the contrary, that it increases the chance of fixing the fish, when he only makes a snatching bite, as is common with the perch when not well on the feed. The former pages of this work having passed through tho press, the following description of the perch of Western New York, his haunts, and mode of preparing for food, by an ardent THE PERCH. 117 and enthusiastic follower of Walton, taken from the Buffalo Commercial Advertise?, will, though rather out of order in this place, be fully appreciated by the perch angler. “ The Yellow Perch. This beautiful and active fish is almost omnipresent in the fresh waters of the Northern States. There are probably two distinct but similar species in our country, blended together under this common name. The perch of New England differs from ours principally in the shape of the head. In the Saratoga Lake, Owasco Lake, Cayu- ga Outlet, the Flats of Lake Huron, and many other localities, the perch is larger than with us, frequently weighing three pounds. Among the perch of our streams and river, a half pounder is a very portly citizen — though on a few particular bars they are sometimes taken in considerable numbers, averaging nearly a pound each. It is almost always to be had, from earliest Spring to the commencement of Winter ; and when poor Piscator has had all his lobsters taken by the sheeps- head, and utterly despairs of bass, he can, at any time, and almost any where, in our river, bait with the minnow and tho worm, and retrieve somewhat from frowning fortune, by catching a mess of perch. “ In the Spring, as soon as the ice has left the streams, tho perch begins running up our creeks to spawn. He is then caught in them in great plenty. About the middle of May, however, he seems to prefer tho Niagara’s clear current, and almost entirely deserts the Tonawnnda, and other amber waters. You then find him in the eddies, on the edge of swift ripples, and often in the swift waters, watching for the nmmow. As the water weeds increase in height, ho en- sconces himself among them, and, in mid-summer, comes out to seek his prey only in the morning and towards night. Ho Beem8 to delight especially in a grassy bottom, and when the black frost has cut down the tall water-weeds, and the moro delicate herbage that never attains the surface is withered, he 148 THE PEHCH. disappears until spring, — probably secluding himself in the depths of the river. “ The back fin of the perch is large, and anned with strong spines. He is bold and ravenous. He will not give way to the pike or to the black bass ; artd though he may sometimes be eaten by them, his comrades will retaliate upon the young of his destroyers. “ The proper bait for the perch is the minnow. Ho will take that all seasons. In mid-summer, however, he prefers the worm, at which he generally bites freely. He is often taken with the grub, or with small pieces of fish of any kind. “ He is a capital fish at all times for the table. His flesh is hard and savory. He should be fried with salt pork rather than butter, and thoroughly done. He makes good chowder, though inferior for that purpose to the black bass or the yel- low pike. “A difference of opinion exists among our most tasteful icthyophagists, as to whether this fish should be scaled or skinned. Let me tell you how to skin him. Take a sharp pointed knife, and rip up the skin along the back, from the posterior extremity of the back fin, on one or both sides of it, along its whole length — then take the fish firmly by the head with the left hand, and with the right take hold of the skin of the back near the head, first on one side and then on the other, and peel it down over the tail. This being done, oil the fins are thereby removed except those of the back and belly, which are easily drawn out by a gentle pulling towards the head. Cut off the head, and you have a skinless, finless lump of pure white llesh. Some say this is the only way a perch should be prepared for the cook’s art — others say it impairs the flavor, and should never be pursued. As for me, I say, ‘ in medio tutissimns ibis ' — neither of the disputants is infallible. Much, very much of the sweetness of the perch and indeed almost all fishes, resides in the skin, which should THE SUN-FISH. 149 never be parted with except for some special reason, there- fore as a general thing, I scale my perch. But, in summer, the skin of the perch is apt to acquire a slight bitter taste, or a smack of the mud — therefore, in summer I skin my perch.” “ Of the Gastronomic Properties of the Perch,” says Blaine, “ whoever has heard of the broiled perch flitches, and water soucliy, of Sir Bamber Gascoyne’s cooking, would not hold us blameless were we to be totally 6ilent. This fish has indeed stood the test of time, and has been as little subjected to the mutations of fashion, perhaps as any one of the finny tribe : it was highly esteemed by the Romans, as we are in- formed by Aristotle, and its praises were sung by Ausonius: “ ‘ Ncc tc dclicia-s niensarum, pcrca silebo Amuigcnos inter pisces diguando muriuis ! ’ ” How to cook the Perch. The pan, in proper hands, will do justice to this fish : many epicures, however, prefer broil- ing. Either method, according to former directions for others of the race, will give satisfaction to the Angler, particularly if very tired, and on the feed. Of the Water Souchy, Holland gives the following me- thod: “Scale, gut, and wash your perch; put salt hi your water; when it boils, put iu the fish with an onion cut in slices, and separate it into rings; a handful of parsley, picked aud washed clean; put iu as much as will turn the water white ; when your fish are done enough, put them in a soup- dish, and pour a little water over them, with the parsley and the onions ; then serve them up with parsley aud butter in a boat.” Large perch may be crimped and boiled in the same way. THE SUN-FISH. This is a small fish, that generally tenants the same pond 150 THE SUN-FI8H. with the perch. They vary in size, shape, and color, in dif- ferent parts of the country, and are taken readily with perch tackle. Their general size is from three to eight inches in length, except a species found in the Ohio, Kentucky, aud other western rivers, where they are frequently taken twelve inches long. Angling for sun-fish, when found in ponds, with small perch, is a favorite amusement of lady Anglers, who often make the best part of pic-nic fishing parties, and, as Walton Bays, “ angle for men aud fish at fish, at the same time.” De- termined old bachelors should be as wary in making up such parties, as they would be in taking a trout, or they will be caught in their own net ; and when beguilod by one of the fair sex, he might break out into a stream of rhyme like the following, by Dr. Donne : “ £01110 livo with mo, and be my love, Aud we will some new pleasures prove, Of goldon sands and chrystnl brooks, With silken lines and silver hooks. * Let coarse, bold hands, from slimy nest, The bedded fish in banks outwrost; Let curious traitors sloavo silk flies, To witch poor wandering fishes’ eyes : “ For thoe, thou noed’st no such decoit, For thou thyself art thine own buit ; That fish that is not cutch’d thoroby, Is wisor far, alas, than I.” CHAPTER IX. OF THE CARP OR TENCH. This beautiful fish is not a native of our own country; but as they have been imported from England by a number of persons in many parts of the United States, for the purpose of stocking their ponds, and protection having been given them by the laws of the State of New-York, they will un- doubtedly become an object of the Angler’s pleasure, it will be well to give some information of then- habits, and the inodes of taking them in other countries. “ The family of carps,” says Smith, “ is distinguished by not possessing an adipose fin ; by a small mouth, and weak jaws, destitute of teeth. The brancial rays are few ; tho body scaly ; the intestines short and without cnecums. They have a swimming bladder, divided into two sacks, somewhat like an hour-glass, and live in fresh water, being harmless, inoffensive, and quiet inhabitants. “ In the United States we have not yet discovered the truo carp of Europe, which is so extensively bred in pleasure grounds. Usually it grows to a length of 12 or 18 inches, but in the stagnant waters of Persia, still larger. It is geue- 152 THE Cini' on TENCH. rally supposod to have been carried to England about 1514.* The quantity of roes exlmded by the female far exceeds the weight of her body. “ Though denominated the wise on account of its sagacity, yet in the spawning season it will allow the Angler to tickle its sides, and is thus easily captured.” In warm climates they are said to grow to avery large size, and often weigh thirty to forty pounds, and measure in length three or four feet. They are known generally in England, Germany, Russia, France, Italy, and Prussia, in which latter country they grow to the enormous sizo mentioned. They are said to live to a great age, instances being found where they have boon supposed to be 1 00 years old. There are from twenty to thirty different species of the carp, most of which give sport to the Angler. Of the com- mon carp of England, Blaine remarks; 11 Its general color is a yellowish olive, much deeper and browner on tho back, and accompanied with a slightly gilded tinge on the sides; the scales are large, rounded, and very distinct; the head is large, and the mouth furnished on each side with a moderate- ly long cirrus or beard, and above the nostrils is a much smaller and shorter pair ; the lateral line is slightly curved, and marked by a row of blackish specks; tho fins are violet brown, except the anal, which has a reddish tinge; the dor- sal fin is broad, or continued to some distance from the mid- dle of tho back towards the tail, which is slightly forked, with rounded lobes.” * Thorn is an ohl distich in reference to their introduction into Knj* land in 1514, which says — “ Hops and turkin ■, carp and bcor, Caine into England all in a year; which is entirely disproved by the authoress of I486, who says ho is a « dnyntous fyssho,” and gives directions for tho “ barneys” or tacklofor taking him. vHE CARP OR TENCH. 153 The carp generally feeds on worms and water insects, and are very tenacious of life, having been known to live a great length of time out of water. As an instance of this, it is re- lated that they have in Holland a way of fattening them, by hanging them up in a net in a damp cellar, and feeding them with bread and milk. They are then placed in wet moss, and moistened twice a day ; and by which method they grow very large, and increase in flavor. Holland gives the following instance of their tenacity of life, through a Mr. Hilditch, who painted the full length por- traits of a carp and tench. “ He kept these fish in a tub for a week, taking them out alternately in the morning at ten o’clock, to paint fiorn, and putting them into water again at foui, during six days; and I may add, that his amiable sister pleaded so well for the lives of these two fish, who had seen so much land service, that Mr. Hilditch took them down from Ludgnte-Hill to Black-1' nur’s-B ridge, when, to use his own words. * they swam away fresh and lively.’ ” They are said to spawn several times in the course of a year, but their time or times of spawning depen Is much on the state of the weather and the temperature of the water. The time when they are known to spawn, is in the months of May or June. They are found near the bottom of muddy streams and ponds, and choose to lie under and near the weeds, plants, and water lilies. When old, they are like the trout, shy and crafty, and sometimes, where they are scarce, require all the skill of the most finished Angler in taking them. In large ponds, however, where they are found in abundance, they are often very tame, and are known in some instances in Ger- many, to he called to feed by tile ringing of a bell. Holland says: “ Even large carp become very tame in ponds where they are regularly fed ; for Mr. Jesse says of 154 THE CARP OR TENCH. some carp or tench* retained by him in a stew, that 1 they were soon reconciled to their situation, and ate boiled pota- toes in considerable quantities ; and the former seemed to have lost their original shyness, eating in my presence with- out any scruple; ’ and Sir John Hawkins says he was assured by a friend of his, that he saw a carp come to the edge of a pond, from being whistled to by a person who daily fed it; and I have, myself, seen carp come to the edge ot the water, to be fed with breadt by the visitors to Roche Abbey. The time for angling for them is from March till Septem- ber, with worms of various kinds, caterpillars, grasshoppers, beetles, wasps, and pastes. They are generally taken at or near the bottom, with a worm attached to a small strong hook, say No. 9 or 10 trout. Tho time of day for taking the carp is thus given by ono of England's poets : — “At early dawn, or rather, when the air Glimmering with fading light, and shadowy evo Is busiest to confer and to bereave; Then, pensive votary! let thy feet repair To silent lakes, or gentle river fair.” Mr. Salter recommends a red worm on the hook, with a gentle on tho point of it. They are also tqkcn with friut and vegetables of different kinds. Salter says they may be taken with marrow-fat peas. Taylor and Walton presci ibe * Tho tench is a species of the carp, differing considerably in nppenr- ance from what is called tho common carp. It is of a dark olive color, with quite smalt scales and nearly even. The inode of angling f° l l i ra is the sumo adopted for the subject of our present chapter. i It may not bo generally known that tho gold-fish and silver-fish, which are seen about ill glass globes, aud small artificial ponds, and eat bread from the hand, oro a species of tho golden enrp. They urc native* of China, where thoy arc bred and sold in great quantities. THE CARP OR TENCH. 155 fruits and vegetables. In the use of peas, Taylor’s plan is to hang one on the hook, about a foot from the ground, and throwing in a few now and then by way of a lure. In order to insiu-e success at any time in taking the carp, ground-bait should be used in all cases, and in the evening previous to your expected sport, if possible. Of the requisite Tackle , and Manner of Taking the Carp , ttofland gives the following: “ Notwithstanding tlio instances of familiarity, it is by no means easy to make a largo carp familiar with your bait : to do this, the greatest nicety* and caution must be observed ; but il the young Angler, who has been often foiled in his attempts, will patiently and im- plicitly follow my instructions, he will become a match for this cunning iish. “ Use a strong rod with running tackle, and have a bot- tom of three yards of fineish gut, and a hook No. 9 or 10 ; use a very light quill float, that will carry two small shot, and bait with a well scoured red worm. “ Now plumb the depth with the greatest nicety, and let your bait just touch, or all but touch the bottom ; but you are not yet prepared ; for a forked stick must be fixed in the bank, on which you must let your rod rest, so that your float shall exactly cover the spot you have just plumbed. Now throw in a sufficient quantity of ground-bait, of bread and bran, worked into a paste, and made into little balls ; or in want of these, throw in the garbage of chickens or ducks ; and all this is to be done the evening ol the day before you intend to fish. “ The next morning, if in summer, be at the pond side where you have baited and plumbed your depth, by four o’clock, at latest, and taking your rod and line, which is already fixed to the exact depth, bait with a small, bright red worm; then approach the water cautiously, keeping out of Bight as much as possible, and drop your bait exactly over 156 THE CARP OR TENCH. the spot you plumbed over night ; then rest part of your rod in the forked stick, and the bottom of it on the ground. You must now retire a few paces, keeping entirely out of flight ; but still, near enough to observe your float ; when you perceive a bite, give a little time ; indeed it is better to wait till you see the float begin to move oft' before you strike, which you may then do smartly ; and as the carp is a leather- mouthed fish, if you manage him well, there is no fear of losing him, unless the pond is very weedy. Be careful to have your line free, that, if a large fish, he may run out some of your line before you attempt to turn him ; as he is a very strong fish, and your tackle rather slight, you must give him careful play before you land him. “ The extreme shyness of the large carp, makes all this somewhat tedious process necessary to insuro success ; but I can safely assert that I scarcely ever took this trouble in vain. Various baits are recommended for carp ; such as green peas parboiled, pastry of all descriptions, gentles and caterpillars, &c. ; but I have found the red worm the best, and next to this, the gentle, and plain bread paste. Those who prefer a sweet paste, may dip the bread in honey. Pastes and gentles will answer better in autumn than iu spring. April and May are, in my opinion, tho best months for carp fishing, and very early in the morning, or late in the evening, is the best timo for pursuing your sport.” Walton remarks : “ The carp bites either at worms or pastes ; and of worms, I think the blueish marsh or meadow- worm is best; but possibly another worm, not too big, may do as .well, and so may a green gentle ; and as for pastes, there are almost as many sorts as there are medicines for the tooth-ache ; but doubtless sweet pastes are best ; I mean pastes made with honey or with sugar, which that you may the better beguile this crafty fish, should be thrown into the pond or place in which you fish for him, some hours or THE CARP OR TENCH. 157 longer, before you undertake your trial of skill with the an- gle-rod; and doubtless, if it be thrown into the water a day or two before, at several times, in small pellets, you are the likeliest, when you fish for carp, to attain your desired sport. li And if you fish for carp with gentles, then put upon your book a small piece of scarlet, the sixth of an inch square, it being soaked in, or anointed with oil of petre, called by some, oil of the rock; and if your gentles be put, two or three days before, into a box anointed with honey, and so put upon your hook as to preserve them to be living, you are as like to kill this crafty fish this way as any other ; but still as you are fishing, chew a little white or brown bread in your mouth, and cast it into the pond about the place where your float swims. Other baits there be ; but these, with diligence and patient watchfulness, will do it better than any that I ever practised or heard of.” Blaine has the following : “ When the angling commences, if possible, keep entirely out sight of the fish ; make no noise ; let the bait slide silently into the water ; and try their fancy for taking it at various depths, beginning with the lowest. If rain falls lightly, the angler would do well to pursue his practise during the whole day. Sometimes, also, success will attend him through the whole of a gloomy day without rain, but in general cases, during the hot months, it ia not possible to fish too early or too late for carp. In a starlight or moonlight night of July, they have been taken after the ‘ witching time ’ even. “ When the angler perceives abite, lie must strike accord- ing to the nature of his bait. If, for instance, in fishing with a lob-worm, he were to strike the moment he felt the float move, he would pull the worm out of the month of the carp, who sucks in after the manner of a barbel. On the contrary, if paste be employed, it is prudent to striko it on the slight- est warning, otherwise the wary animal will suck away all 158 THE CARP OR TENCH. the paste ; bat with a small hook, and a very slight wrist stroke, the nibbling fish may be probably struck ; or if he is not effectually hooked, the fineness of the stroke will not alarm him, and he will return to the charge. Again, when fishing for carp in rivers, it will be found that the habit ol meeting the insects which pass down the stream, makes the fish more oh the alert to prevent their escape ; they take the bait quicker in rivers for this reason, and they should there- fore be struck much quicker.” Walton prepares and dishes up this dainty fish in the fol- lowing sufficiently luxurious style, to make the Angler or reader smack his lips in anticipation. “ But first, I will tell you how to make this carp, that is so curious to be caught, so curious a dish of meat as shall make him worth all your labor and patience. And though it is not without some trouble and charges, yet it will recompense both. Take a carp, (alive if possible) ; scour him, and rub him clean with water and salt, but scale him not; then open him, and put him with his blood and liver, which you must save when you open him, into a small pot, or kettle ; then take sweet marjoram, thyme, or parsley, of each a handful; a sprig of rosemary, and mother-of-savory ; bind them into two or three small bundles, and put them to your carp, with four or five whole onions, twenty pickled oysters, and three anchovies. Then pour upon your carp as much claret wine as will only cover him ; and season your claret well with salt, cloves and mace, and the rind of oranges and lemons. That done, cover your pot and set it on a quick fire, till it be suffi- ciently boiled. Then take out the carp and lay it with the broth into the dish, and pour upon it a quarter of a pound of the best fresh butter, melted and beaten with a half a dozen spoonsful of the broth, the yolks of two or three egg s, and some of the herbs shred ; garnish your dish with lemons, and so serve it up, and much good do you.” CHAPTER X. OF THE STRIPED BASSE, OR ROCK-FISH. Tins noble and highly prized fish is peculiar to our own country, and to particular parts of it. As an object of sport, for perfect symmetry and beauty of appearance, and as a dish for the table, it is considered second only to the salmon. They are found iu tho rivers, bays, and inlets, from the Capes ot the Delaware to Massachusetts Bay, and also in the rivers and bays of Florida. They appear in the greatest abundance in the Chesapeake Bay, # and in the rivers, bays, inlets and creeks in the vicinity of New-York, and are taken in large quantities, from the size of a common trout to the weight of upwards of a hundred pounds. In addition to the above described names, they are some- times called Perch. The late learned and distinguished Go- vernor De Witt Clinton, who was a member of the Philoso- * A friend who angles in Chcsnpeako Bay, below Baltimore, says that ho has seen them as long ns a crow-bar! This is not quite so bad as bo- Ing as big as u lump of chalk, as the crow-bar was in sight at tho time, and measured about fivo foot six inches. 160 THE STRIPED BASSE. phical Society of the city of New York, says that Basse is a Dutch word, signifying perch. As there is a difference of opinion among the few American authors, in respect to this fish, we give their own words. Smith of Massachusetts, defines this species as the Stri- ped Basse , Rock Basse — Perea Labrax — (Lin. Scisena Bloch.) li On the sides are parallel lines, like narrow ribbons, eight in number, which give it the name of the striped basse: the scales are large, of a metallic lustre ; in the opper- culum, the middle plate is serrated ; the last portion of the third plate the gill cover, constituted of three pieces, has two nearly concealed spines. In the brancial membrane are seven rays ; pectoral, sixteen ; ventral, six ; dorsal, eight in the first, fourteen in the second ; anal fifteen, and in the can* dal 17 ; some of them in each fin, according to the size, it would appeal’, of the individual, arc stiff or spinous. “ Three or four of the stripes reach the tail, — the num- ber not always being constant ; and the remainder gradually disappear at different points on the abdominal walls ; the eyes are white, the head strikes one as being long, and the under jaw, as in the pike, juts beyond its fellow. Next to the mackerel, this is decidedly the handsomest of native fishes. “ Striped Bass, are a sea fish, and principally subsist near the mouths of rivers, up which they run as high as they caa conveniently go. During the approach of winter, instead of striking out into the deep water of the open ocean, like most other anadromous species, the basse finds a residence in ponds, coves, rivers, and still arms of the sea, where undis- turbed and comfortable, it remains till the following spring. The principal rivers in the state of Maine, as the Penobscot, &c., are the places where they are now* taken in the great- est abundance, and of the finest flavor and size. In all tko rivers, too, of Massachusetts, they are also found, at the in- * 1833. THE STRIPED BASSE. 161 clement season of winter, but the fishery is not so productive as in Maine, whence the best in the Boston market are annu ally brought.” The following is from the Transactions of the Literary and Philosophical Society, by Dr. Mitehill. “ Mitehill' s Perch , Striped Danse or Rock-Fish, (Perea Mitchilli), with eight parallel lines from head to tail. One of the largest and most excellent of the New York fishes: may be found from the weight of an ounce to that of seventy pounds and upwards. The position of the ventral fins rather behind the pectoral, made me once incline to place him in the abdominalcs. Ilis second gill plate is finely serrated. That circumstance, if lie remained among the thoracic, would rank him among the perca?, and when I decided in favor of changing his order, I was obliged to constitute a new genus for him, which I called roccus. But having since found that there are fishes whose ventral fins are further back on the abdo- men than this, that are nevertheless considered as thoracic, I have, on reconsideration, persuaded myself it will be most correct toplacohim among his compeers of the perch family. ’’ After a similar description to that given by Smith, our naturalist continues: “ But one of the most obvious and distinguishing features of this fish, is the striped appearance of his body. From head to tail his back is marked by lon- gitudinal lines. The ground color is pale, brown, whitish and silvery. On this are delineated the aforesaid lines in parallel rows. These rows, at some seasons, appear black, and make a strong contrast. At other times they are more faint, and seem to be faded into a reddish brown. When the brown thus predominates, dark specks or spots can be traced at regular distances along the stripes, particularly toward tho back. “ Tho number of these stripes is usually eight; and four of them most commonly reach tho tail. The rest are fre- 162 THE STRIPED BASSE. quently shorter ; vanishing unequally in their progress. Belly a fine mixture of silver and white. Scales adhere firmly. “ This fish is very highly prized by the New-Yorkers. He is snvory and excellent beyond the generality of fishes. His common abode is the salt water ; but he migrates to the fresh streams and recesses to breed during the spring, and for shel- ter in winter. “ He takes the hook, especially when baited with soft crab, Small ones are catched by the boys, from the wharves and boats every where near the city. “Their greatest run is late in the fall. Instead of going away on the approach of winter, the striped bass seeks refuge in bays, ponds, and recesses where he may remain warm and quiet. Here the fishermen find him, and make great hauls during the coldest season, when very great numbers ai'O brought to market in a frozen state. At this time it is usual to take some very large and heavy ones. Yet I have seen a dozen at a time, of the weight of fifty pounds each, in Oc- tober, while the weather was very mild. “ Ho is also taken in seines during the summer, and in au- tumn. Iudeed, there is no fish that stays more steadily with us all the year round, than the rock; and ho is found of all sizes, to suit all sorts of palates.” The basse has been believed, as stated at the commence- ment of this article, to be a native of this country, and was supposed first to have been noticed by Mitchill ; but the fol- lowing from Smith, would lead to a ditFerent conclusion. “ By what authority Dr. Mitchill gave his own name to the striped bass, * Perea MUchilli ,’ we cannot divine: he might with equal propriety have tacked his name to the white shark, or to the bones of the mastodon, and the last would have savored less of vanity, than affixing his cognomen to a common table fish, known from time immemorial all over Europe.” THE STRIPED BASSE. 163 If the above assertion of Smith’s is correct, it is very strange that so important an angle fish has not been known to the angling community of Europe ; for out of upwards of an hundred books on the subject of angling, in Europe, only one or two makes mention of any kind of basse whatever, and they are a species of trout, differing entirely from the striped basse of our waters. However, to us Anglers, (although we should like to see the learned Doctors agree,) it matters not “ whether we have the name so long as wo liavo the game.” As an object of sport, they are sought after with great avidity, by the sportsmen of the parts of New- York and New-Jersey, bordering on the Hudson river, and have been taken of quite a large size as far up as Albany * and Troy. They are also made very profitable to market fishermen, at some seasons being taken in great numbers, with very little trouble. In the early part of January of the pre- sent year, 25,000 pounds were taken in Point Judith Ponds, the majority of a large size, that netted tho proprietors $5,000. They are generally angled for with a strong, pliable rod, 12 to 15 feet in length, made of ash, with a lance-wood top. For boat fishing, a rod about 12 feet in length is considered long enough, but for bridge or bank fishing, 14 to 18 feet have the preference. They may be had in every variety of style at the tackle stores in the city of New-York, whore no pains or expense is spared in adapting them to the peculiar tastes of the Angler. Attached to the rod should bo a reel, suffi- ciently largo to contain from 300 to GOO feet of flax, grass, or silk line ; to your line a swivel sinker, and float, according to the current of your fishing ground, and a leader, from three to six feet in length, double for fall fishing, and single for the Bpring run. Some of the best Anglers, however, prefer using * In tho spring of 18*1*1, one was taken with a rod and root, in Sau- gcrtioB creek, weighing fifteen und a half pounds. 164 THE STHIPKD BASSE. single gut throughout the season, and if it can he procured of u large size, round and even throughout, in experienced hands it will be apt to take the most and largest fish. To your leader should he a Limerick or Kirby hook, from No. 0 to 3, according to the season and sizo of the game. In no species of angling is it so necessary to have superior quality of tackle, ns in the one under consideration. The beginner should therefore provide himself with such descrip- tions as will meet any emergency ; for in salt water, in the bays and large rivers, the fisher will often he crossed by fishes of great magnitude, and by taking the proper precaution to have every thing strong and durable, he will often prevent loss of tackle and loss of patience, two very important iteinB of a successful Angler's stock. An experienced Angler and mechanic, who has made many a rod, gives the following description of a proper one for basso fishing. “ Your rod should be about 12 nr 13 feet in length, not too stiff nor yet too limber, for by being too stiff you aro apt to break your tackle, or lose your fish by being struck too hard, and by being too light you are apt to break it, and thus spoil your sport. Besides, a rod 6f medium size is lighter, more convenient to handle, and much more likely to give you satisfaction after a tedious day’s angling, if any such should be your lot, than if it were stiff — a fault which many new beginners are apt to acquire. For general basso angling, the one I should prefer (and it is the one most in use with good sportsmen') would be about seven-eighths of an inch in diameter at the butt ferrule, and a true taper to the point, which should not exceed ftiree-bixteonths of an inch in diameter, making your butt sufficiently large for the grasp of your hand, say an inch and a quarter in diameter, which is about as large as will well fill your hand ; larger is inconve- nient — smaller will be likely to cramp your fingers. “ Your hooks should be about No. 2 of Kirby, or No. 1 of TIIK STRIPED BASSE. 165 Limerick, firmly lashed to one or two strands of gut, accord- ing to the run of your fish. If you fish with one strand of extra strong gut next your hook, yon will be safe enongh, and be as likely to take as good fish as with stronger tackle ; but be sure that your leader, where your sinker is put on, and where the heaviest strain generally comes, bo stronger than your hook length, and of two strands of strong gut, or three strands of medium size ; fur by that means, if you should be so unfortunate as to get fouled on the bottom, you will es- cape with the loss of your hook only, whereas if your tackle be of an uniform strength, yon will most likely lose the whole, line, sinker, hooks, ami all, which may probably make you stvcar; and this, according to Walton, is a bad practice; for as the old adage goes, « He who swears takes no fish.’ “ You are to remember that in boat fishing, it you do not fish with a float, or with a running or sliding sinker on the bottom, your sinker should be light enongh to float off with the tide, and be able to feel the bottom at all times, so that if your sinker be 20 feet off, you can still feel it strike the bot- tom, and lift it up, when you can let out more line. I prefer this mode of fishing, both for basse and weak-fish, to any other; and you will be likely to get better fish, and more of them. “ You are to consider, also, the times of tide, the baits in season, the quietness of the spot selected for your fishing, (for tho basse, like the trout, will avoid, all places where there is au unusual noise,) and the full or iiennt tides, which latter aro allowed by all salt water Anglers to be tho best time for taking fish, and which I know to be the fact from experience. This time of tide, when it happens early in the morning, or towards sun-down, with the wind off shore, and a gentle rip- ple on the water, is the time when basse are most upon the feed, and the sportsman's efforts are generally crowned with success. 1C6 TH E STRIPED BASSE. “You are to fish as near bottom as possible, either with float or without ; if the tide be too strong, the float should be dispensed with; but a little experience will give proper judgment as to the time of using either, both.” The following, from an old and experienced amateur, who has angled for many years in the viciuity ofNew-York, will be found excellent information for those who think that “ No ungling can surpass Tlio taking of tho bassc.” “ The Striped Basse is one of the finest fish of our waters. By sportsmen it is considered a game fish of the salt water tribe, affording capital amusement to the angler, by his great strength and activity. There are many places in the vicinity of New-York city, where these fish are frequently found in great plenty. They commence taking the hook generally in April. The first fishing ground in the neighborhood, in the spring, is in the creeks at Kingsbridge — next at Macomb's Dam, Newtown creek, and Jersey flats. At this early sea- son, shrimp is far the best bait, especially where tho water is salt, though in the Passaic, at Belleville, anglers are very successful in the use of shad-roe as a bait. This bait is rather difficult to manage by a novice. The experienced angler makes use of tow, or wool, cutting his bait with as much of the skin as possible, and winding a few strands of the tow or wool around it ou the hook, which prevents the current from washing it off, which it would soon do without this pro caution. On the reefs of the Passaic and Hackensack rivers, many of these noble fish are taken early in April. The shad- roe has been tried repeaieJly at Macomb’s Dam and in New- town creek, without success ; tho reason is obvious to the writer. The shad run up the fresh water streams to spawn, and are never known to spawn at either of the places just mentioned, and I have never had much success with this THE STRIPED BASSE. 167 bait, excepting in fresh water streams. The shrimp ie a much pleasanter and cleaner bait, and is very generally found to be successful in the early spring fishing, and continues so imtil crabs commence shedding their coats freely. In the latter part of Juno, the bass prefer the soft or shedder crab, though the shrimp continues to be used with succoss, until near the first of August, when the crab is decidedly the best of all baits that can be used. The mode of angling conse- quently varies at this time. While using the shrimp, the an gler is generally most successful, by using the float, and sus- pending his hook from mid-water to within a foot of the bot- tom, excepting where the water is quite shallow, when it should hang just so as to clear the bottom, as in water of little depth the fish look for their prey near the bottom. But when crab bait is used, the best mode of fishing is for the bait to lie on tlio bottom ; a sliding sinker is then the best, always as light as the tide or current will allow. The largest fish are generally taken by thus fishing at the bottom, with- out a float ; and the reason for dispensing with the float is ob- vious, if we will look at the habits of the fish. In angling with shrimp, the bait should be suspended as above stated, becauso the shrimp, by the action of the current, are fre- quently swept from the edges of the channel, or driven out by cels, or other enemies, and the bass look for them accord- ingly ; when feeding on the crab, however, these fish search along the bottom to find the crab in his helpless and defence- less stute, and swim witli their bodies at an angle, with the head downward, examining the bottom, where experience teaches them to find their prey ; thus a crab bait suspended by a flout at midwater would usually escape their observa- tion, and the angler unacquainted with these facts would mourn over his want of success without being able to ac- count for it. In the latter part of September, the shrimp again begin to come into use, and iu October, these, with the 168 THE STRIPED BASSE. common kill fish, or, as it is usually called, killey fish, and the spearing in October, are decidedly the best baits, espe- cially in running waters, such as the streams at Macomb's Dam, Pelham Bridge, &c.; while in some of our fresh water fishing grounds, such as Hackensack river and English Neigh- borhood croek, the white opened soft-clam is found by far the best bait in October and November, especially for large fish. “Another mode of fishing for striped bas3 is practiced by fishermen and amateurs, by which very large fish are often taken. It is by trolling with a strong hand line, with a real squid for bait, or an artificial bait made in various ways: sometimes of the white leg bone of a sheep, or of bright metal, such as block tiu, pewter, &c.: these can bo had at the fishing tackle shops. The boat is gently rowed along by a skilful oarsman, who rests on his oars the moment a fish is struck, giving the angler full opportunity to play his fish with skill and care, both of which are highly requisite, for the fish thus taken are sometimes very large. Those weighing 20, 30, and even 40 pouuds have often been taken in the East river, in the neighborhood of Hellgate, and in Harlem river, little Hellgate, which is the arm of the stream which passes between Ward’s and Randall’s islands, and in Morrisania creek. This is all fine trolling ground, but as the best suc- cess is usually met with at night, this precludes any but the most robust from enjoying this kind of sport — though fre- quently fine fish are taken during the day. “The fishermen who supply our market with these fine fish, have lately been very successful in the use of set lines late in the fall. In the neighborhood of Piermont, on the Hudson, this mode has been employed to groat advantage: a strong lino is extended from one stake or anchor to another at given distances, and to this cord are attached short lines with strong hooks, baited with a small tomcod or other live fish : at the proper time of tide the fishermen raise one end THE STRIPED BASSE. 169 of the line and proceed to take the fish from the hooks. In one night several hundred weight of these excellent fish have been taken from two or three of these set lines, to be seen alive on the stands in Washington market late in December. Some of the finest the writer has ever eaten were bought at the stand of Mr. Hiscox in that market.” On the subject of the different baits for the basse, it is proper to remark that, like the trout, the rock is very par- ticular about the quality of his food: in some places at some seasons he will jump readily at clam bait, and at other places he will take nothing but shrimp or crab. At Macomb’s Dam, Harlem river, at particular periods, the best bait is a small, beautiful fish called the spearing, which sometimes he will take and nothing else, and other times nothing but shedder crabs will satisfy his dainty palate. At many places hi the Hudson river, and in the bay, the clam bait is sufficient to hook him in largo quantities. At the former place he is rather epicurean, and as long as Astor House fare is offered him by the peculiarity of the ground, he will not be content to take small dishes, and rejects everytliing for his favorite fancy at the time. In the striking and running of the basse, equally as much pleasure is given as with the trout and salmon, and is to be treated in the same manner as directed for those fishes. Care should always be taken, after having hooked him, to keep him well up from the bottom, with the line well stretched ; and if the angler be not so fortunate as to have a cast in his eyes, os so elegantly described on former pages, from the “ Angler’s Souvenir,” let him be watchful of every move- ment, have faith in his tackle , (which should always bo examined for that purpose previous to wetting his line,) courage, patienco and perseverance, and there will bo no difficulty in taking the largest run of fish with little trouble. CHAPTER XI. OP THE WEAK-FISH, WIIEAT-FISII, OR SQUETEAGUE. This is another native fish, as far ns known, anil is found only in the vicinity of New-Yorlc ami Massachusetts. It takes the various names, of weak-fish, wheat-fish, ami squc- teauge from different ascribed causes; the first from the weakness of its mouth. The second name has its origin from the fact of its having made its appearance always at harvest time, which is not now the fact, as they begin to run during the month of May, and are taken in small quantities in the month of April. The latter bold and elegant name is given by the native inhabitants of the island of Now-York, who once were free to roam where the more refiued now find a home. . . There are two species, as described by Mitchill, as iul- ,ow8 : “The Weak- Fish — (Labrus Squeteague)— with oven tail, speckled back and sides, one or more sharp, long front teeth in the upper jaw, and yellowish ventral and anal fins. One of the most numerous and useful oi Ncw-York fishes, particularly during the season when the cold is not consider THE WKAK-FIS1I. 171 able. Size commonly from a foot to fifteen inches; but often grows larger. I weighed one, for example, that measured 27 inches in length, by seven in depth, and found him hea- vier than six pounds. He never goes into fresh streams, or ponds, but within the limits of the salt water is taken in al- most all the places where the rock-fish is caught. The weak- fish is so much the companion of the basse, that I once gave him the specific name of Comes. Ho resembles the rock m the following particulars: 1. A wide mouth, with small teeth in the lips and jaws; 2. Patches of teeth at the bottom of a capacious throat; 3. Two dorsal fins, the foremost of which has eight rays; 4. A lateral line passing into the cau- dal fin; 5. A nearly corresponding number of sixteen rays in the pectoral, and seventeen in the caudal fins; G. Double nostrils, and an elongated lower jaw; 7. A projecting head; and, 8. Large pale yellow eyes on its sides. But there are no tangible serrce on the gill cover, the divisions at the edge are visible only. They are not long, but yield to the slightest touch. Also the gill cover is not fairly triparite; but consists of no more than two plain divisions. * * * * The weak-fish cannot, therefore, be deemed a pcrca. I havo been obliged to separate him from his companion, the rock, notwithstand- ing their numerous points of similitude. I have, upon the whole, associated him with the great family of labrus; a connexion he seems to be qualified for, by his smooth and scaly gill covers, his sharp and strong teeth, and the softness of his dorsal rays. I have given him the specific name by which the Narragauset natives distinguish him — squeteague. It would have been as easy to have assigned the Mohegan appellation, Checouts. Head and back of the weak-fish, brown, with frequently a tinge of greenish. The spaces to- wards the sides, faintly silvery, with dusky specks. These gradually disappear on the sides, until on descending to the belly a clear white pervades from the chin to the tail. The 172 THE WEAK-FISH. swimming bladder is convertible to good glue. I have eaten os fine blanc-mange from it as from the isinglass of the stur- geon. lie is a fish of goodly appearances and is wholesome and we]l-tasted, though rather soft: is brought to market in great abundance during the summer lhouths. He is taken by the line and the seine. He is called weak-fish, as some say, because he does not pull very much after he is hooked;* or as others allege, because the laboring men who are fed upon him are weak by reason of the deficient nourishment in that kind of food. Certain peculiar noises under water, of a low rambling or drumming kind, are ascribed by the fisher- men to the squeteague. Whether the sounds come from these fishes or not, it is certain that during their season, they may be heard coming from the bottom of the water; and in places frequented by weak-fish, and not in other places; and when the weak-fish depart, the sounds are no more heard. “A beautiful variety of this fish is sometimes seen, with the following characters, to wit: “ Spotted Squeteague — (Lab. Sq. maculatus).— ' There are black, well defined spots among the specks over the back and sides, and checkering the caudal and second dorsal fins, The pectoral fins are rather small: ventral and anal fins not yellow but brownish. The parts thus variegated with spots have a pretty appearance.” They bite freely at the shrimp and shedder crab, and will often take clam bait as readily. In the vicinity of New-York they are found in the greatest abundance in the hay off Com- munipaw, Oyster Islands, Buckwheat Island, below Eliza- bethtown Point, at Buttermilk Channel, the Owl's Head, Gowanus Bay, and Manhattanville; and although they no- * Tins is a great mistake ; the squeteague, considering the weakness or softness of the inner part of his mouth, is a fair pulling fish ; and When they are hooked of a good sizo, uro known to givo nearly as much sport ae the more favored rock. THE WEAK-FISH. 173 company the basso in salt water, they generally swim deeper, more in the eddies, and farther off from the shore. The experienced angler will often after angling for basse without success, change his ground, drop his bait a little deeper in the water, and return satisfied with his quota of weak-fish, if not his expected sport in basse. Although they are not as active when hooked, and do not compare as a game fish with the basse, the same description of tackle is requisite ; and the angler who occasionally lays off with a slack line, has to suffer some from the larger and more nimble rock, who will often be off with hooks, line, float and sinker, without particular notice. Some of those who make the squcteague a favorite object of their pursuit, prefer a light, round, bent hook called the Aberdeen, and others a light Kirby size No. 1, which they think increases their chance of success. A large hook, say No. 1, or even No. 0, on the whole, should be used, although the Limerick * is a good and sure hook. The Kirby, baited with a good sized shrimp, will be found for this weak mouthed auiinal a more sufficient guaranty for the faithful landing of any sizo that swims. A friend who pursues this sport during the season, with much success, says — “ I once saw one taken by a friend of mine, that weighed eight pounds and a half, which is the largest I ever saw.” You frequently take from 10 to 40 pounds of this fish in a day, when they are in abundance. The afternoon tides are idways the best, about two hours beforo sundown, and as long after that as they keep from croaking, when you had better leave off, as you will take no more of them. * * Some profer tho Limerick, slightly curbed, both for rock Olid equo- toaguo. CHAPTER XII. OF THE KING-FISII, OR BARB. This is a fine fish, both for the hook and the palate, and is found only and seldom in the bay and harbor of New- York. Whence he comes, and whither he goes, and of his habits, little is known, even among the oldest inhabitants of New- York. The older fraternity of anglers, however, know more about him than those of later growth: certain it is, that among those who have had the pleasure of his acquaint- ance with a hook and line, few can ever forget him. As u game fish he is considered as giving more real sport than either the trout, basso, or salmon. His name and where- abouts has only to be whispered to the New York Angler, and he is off after sport that perhaps he has anticipated for years. # “ King-Fish — (Sceama Nebulosu — Mitchill) — With cir- rhous chin, clouded skin, and ragged, blunt processes, partly overhangiug the upper lip. Length, sixteen or eighteen inches; depth about three; though some individuals are larger. Head and body scaly. Color of the head and body THE KING-FISH, OR BARB. 175 alight brown, glossed with silver)" and blue, and interspersed with spots and blotches of a darker hue. Some of these clouds slant obliquely forward from the dorsal fin ; some run obliquely backward from the nape of the neck; and some pass midway from the sides to the tail. There is here and there an insulated dark patch, with dirty discolorations to- wards the white belly. He grows rapidly thick and stout towards the thorax, and then gently and gradually slopes away towards the tail.” He is taken by the angler for basse and weak fish with their ordinary tackle, with the exception of the hook, which should be rather smaller, say No. 4, Limerick or Kirby sal- mon, to accommodate the mouth of the barb, which is rather small. The following description of his grounds, and manner of taking him, by a friend who has had much experience, will close our article on the king-fish to the gratification of all who have or ever expect to bite or get a bite from this interesting fish: “ This is one of the finest fish for the table, procured from the salt water. They are not plenty in the neighborhood of this city, though occasionally a season occurs wlpcn they are taken in considerable numbers. I have often taken 20 or 30 in a tide, in the neighborhood of Communipaw, that delight- ful little Dutch town, rendered famous in history by the re- nowned Knickerbocker. “A little below this village there is a piece of hard bot- tom on the extensive fiat which is spread out from Jersey City down nearly to Bergen Point. A single rocjc is bare at low water on this hard ground, called Black Tom. The best ground, in my experience, is found thus: Row your boat from Black Tom directly for the Jersey shore, sounding with an oar until tho bottom becomes soft and the water a little deeper than on tho hard. You are then at the edge of what 176 THE ICING-FI8H, OIC BARD. is called Caving Channel — a channel running north from Ca- ving Point. Back your boat about ten feet on the hard, and anchor at low water: as the young flood comes in, if there are any of these fish in the harbor you will most probably find them here. I have taken from ten to thirty on this ground, together with basse and weak-fish, in a tide. “The best bait forking-fish is shedder crab: the hook should be smaller than for basse, as they have not a large mouth. They are fine fish for the rod, being very powerful and active, running deeper than basse or weak fish, and in a way peculiar themselves, so that an experienced angler can always distinguish them on their first run. The largest I have ever taken in this harbor I have found on this ground, weighing up to one and a half pounds. They are sometimes taken of larger size in the south bays of Long Island, but rarely if ever over two pounds. There are many other spots on the extensive oyster beds on these flats, particularly along in front of Communipaw, and along the fyke fences between Jersey City and Ellis’ Island. In Jamaica bay I have had many a fine day’s sport with these capital fish. “The following communication, giving an account of my excursions in that bay, was written by me at the time, and published in the Commercial Advertiser of Gth July, 1827. This I admit was an extraordinary performance, but I have many times taken over one hundred in a tide: but of late years these fish have become scarce in those waters, it being supposed that their enemy the blue-fish, by preying on their young, have caused the scarcity. Poor Bannister, the guide spoken of, Ins long since slept with his fathers. A pleasanter guide, and a more honest man, could not easily be found. Mrs. llicks is still “at homo” to her friends, and as kind and accommodating as ever. “ 4 Great Flaking . — On Friday last, a gentleman of this city went out from Rockaway, into Jumaicu bay, with his THE KING-FISH, OR BARB. 177 son, n lad of twelve years of age. They commenced fishing at half past seven in the morning, spent half an hour in dining at noon, and quit fishing at half past one; having taken with their rods in the six hours, four hundred and seventy-two king-fish. Their guide was Joseph Bannister. None of these fish were taken by him, as he was diligently employed during the whole lime in preparing bait. That it may not be said that this was a wanton waste of one of the finest kinds of fish produced in our waters, it is deemed right to add, that a large number of families in the neighborhood were supplied gratuitously with them, and none of this lot of noble fish were wasted. Mr. Bannister will be found on inquiry at Mrs. Phebe Hicks’ boarding house, where the parties were Staying. This house is most cheerfully recommended for its delightful situation, great cleanliness, excellent fare and kind and obliging family, as well as for the highly respectable company usually frequenting it. “N. B. Mr. Bannister provides a boat and bait, and is the oarsman for the day. Ilis charge is $1.25.” The friend who so well describes the king-fish, and his particular grounds, is among the few who have enjoyed the pleasant sport of taking this rare and active game, informs me that since the period alluded to, they have visited the harbor of New- York but seldom and in small quantities. As there is a time for everything, there will no doubt be times when the barb will condescend to call on the angling community of the goodly city of Gotham, when the foregoing instructions will be sufficient to rnuke them “Non semper nou paratus.” CHAPTER XIII. OF THE BLACK-FISH, OR TAUTOG. This is another of our native fishes, found only in the waters of New-York, Massachusetts, Rhode-Island and vicinity. They are not so much an object of sport as the two last named, but as they come early, and sometimes in great abun- dance, and when taken and fresh cooked are a fine table fish, they deserve a particular place in our extended catalogue of angle fishes. Black-Fish of New-York , Tautog of the Mohcgans — Tide Black-Fish , or Runners — (Mite hill) — “ The name of this fish is derived from the color of its back and sides, being of a bluish or crow black. “The black fish abounds in the vicinity of Long Island, and is a stationary inhabitant of the salt water. He never visits the rivers, like salmon or sturgeon; nor, oil the other hand, deserts his dwelling place as they do. lie is fond of rocks, reefs and rough bottoms. He is taken through the whole course of Long Island Sound, Fisher’s Island Sound, and in the neighborhood of Rhode-Island. The tautog was THE BLACK-FISH. 179 not originally known in Massachusetts bay ; but within a few years he has been carried beyond Cape Cod, and has multi- plied bo abundantly that the Boston market has now a full supply, without the necessity of importing from Newport and Providence. Black-fish, however, does not confine himself to rough bottoms; for he is also caught in the southern bays of Long Island, and on the banks of the ocean oft Sandy Hook. He is considered, by the New-Yorkers, as a very fine fish for the table. He grows to the weight of ten or twelve pounds, and even more; but it is a fish of a good size, that equals two or three. “He may be kept for a long time in ponds or cars; and fed, and even fatted there. When the cold of winter be- numbs him he refuses to eat any more, and a membrane is observed to form over the vent, and close it. He begins to regain appetite with the return of warmth in the aping. The blossoming of the dogwood, (cornus florida,) early m April, is understood to denote the time of baiting black-fish. As soon as these flowers unfold, the fishermen proceed with their hooks and lines to the favorite places. If there is no dogwood, a judgment is derived from the vegetation ot the chestnut tree (castunea vesca). The season ol bailing is reckoned very favorable until the increasing warmth ol the season brings food enough to fill their stomachs, and they thereupon afford less pastime to the sportsman and less profit to the professor. The people express this sentiment in these coarse rhymes: “‘When chestnut leuves ore ns big as thumb nail, Then bito black-fish without fail ; liut when chestnut leaves are as long as a span, Then catch black-fish if you can.’ ” “The common bait for block-fish is the soft clam, or pisser, (mya.) The soldier crab, or tiddler, (ocypouu,) will fire- 180 THE BLACK-PISH quently tempt him when he refuses to taste the other. Aiul he snaps very readily at the large finny worm of the suit water beaches, (nereis,) when used on a hook for him. “Some persons, who live contiguous to the shores where arc situated the rocks frequented by tautog, invito the fish there by baiting. By this is meant the throwing overboard broken clams or crabs, to induce the black-fish to renew their visits, and fine sport is procured. “Rocky shores and bottoms are the haunts of black-fish. Long experience is required to find all these places of resort Nice observations on the land-marks, in different directions, are requisite to enable a fishing party to anchor on the proper spot. When, for example, a certain rock and tree range one way, with a barn window appearing over a headland the other way, the boat being at the point where two such lines intersect each other, is exactly over some famous rendezvous. To insure success on such expectation, it is proper to have a pilot along, well versed in all the local and minute know- ledge. According to the number and distance of the rocks and reefs visited, will be the time consumed, from the dura- tion of a few hours to a long summer’s day. An opinion pre- vails, that the black-fish can hear very well ; and, for fear of scaring them away, the greatest stillness is observed. He is a strong fish, and pulls well for one of his weight and size. “At some places black-fish bite best upon the Hood: in others, they are voracious during the ebb. Thunder accom- panying a shower, is an indication that no more of them can be caught. The appearance of a porpoise infallibly puts an end to sport. Curious stories are told of fish in the wells and ponds, floating in their native element, having been found dead, after sharp and repeated flashes of lightning. Dull weather, with an easterly wind, is generally the omen of ill luck. 1 he exploits performed in fishing for tautog, are recounted occasionally, with remarkable glee, and they afford TIIE BtACK-FIS It. 181 a never-failing theme of entertainment to those who are en- gaged in this sort of adventure. Though the hand line is generally used, the rod is sometimes employed to great ad- vantage. The black-fish is remarkable for retaining life a long time after he is taken out of water. He sometimes swims over even ground, and is caught in seines.” An observant New-York amateur, who delights in black- fish angling, gives us the following: “ The black-fish, or, as he is called in the eastern states, the tautog, is a very fine fish for the table, well known to all epicures, mid affords fine amusement to the angler. lie is taken on reefs or around detached rocks, where the food in which he delights is found. The usual baits employed in taking black-fish are the hard and soft shelled clam, the rock crab and soldier crab or fiddler, shrimp and shedder lobster or crab : these two last are decidedly the best that can be used, though in many situations the shrimp and the two small kinds of crab above named are sometimes to be preferred. As a general bait for these fish, the shedder lobster is my favorite, nud I have long been a successful angler for these fish. There is a very great difference observable in the black-fish, even those feeding together at the same rock. Those taken close to the rock, especially if it has shelving sides, are shorter, much darker colored, and thicker than those which are found playing in the edge of the tide as it sweeps past the rock — these are the long fish, with larger heads than the others, and of much lighter color, especially about the head and snout, the latter frequently being nearly white, whence they are called white-noses and tide-runners. They seem to delight in the eddies at the very edge of the swift water, where they watch for the shrimp, or small crabs, which are home along by the tide. By casting the line a little above the rock, uud letting the buit float with the cur- rent past it, holding the rod with an even and ready hand, 182 THE BLACK-FISH. you present the bait to his expecting eye in the most natural way — and this should always be the study of the angler who wishes to succeed. His bite is much more powerful than that of the rock-fish, though both are bold biting fish, and tp the experienced angler, with good tackle, rarely missed. “ The rock-fish lie under the overhanging rock-weed, on the watch for live bait, shrimp, or crabs, dart out and seize their prey, and retire to their harbor, drawing the line from the perpendicular to a slanting position, and that without the angler feeling him ; and I have taken many a dark-sided fel- low, merely from watching the slant of the line. Both kinds are very powerful, and although they rarely run far from the rock when hooked, their extraordinary vigor, and stubborn resistance, make them a capital subject for the rod. The largest I have ever taken with the rod, weighed five and a half pounds. This was at Oyster-Pond Point, at the Sound end of Long Island. This is one of the best places which I know, of easy access from New-York, for taking these fine fish. An excellent temperance hotel is kept by Mr. Latham, and good boats and guides are to be had. “ The best mode of arranging rod tackle for black-fish is this : Attach two plaited gut snells, one of twelve inches and one of eight, to a small brass ring, the size of those used on the second joint of the rod from the hand ; put a slide sinker on the line, and tie to the ring, and all is ready. The slide sinker is by far the best, as it is frequently desirable to throw from your boat to a sunken rock, and as the sinker lies on the bottom, the smallest action of the fish at the bait is readily felt. “ For hand-line fishing I prefer the same mode of arranging the hooks to any other : the usual way is to have a loop at the end of the line ; attach the loop to the eye of the sinker, and fasten the snells on the line just above the latter, so that they will hang about twelve and eight inches below.” THE BLACK -FISH. 183 The rod proper for taking black-fish, should be similar to that described for trolling, say about twelve feet long, and quite stiff; the line stout, and of strong flax or hemp; and although not absolutely necessary for black-fish alone, should be attached to a good running reel ; by this arrangement, the sportsman will be prepared, which is often the case, to meet a drum or large basse, which are sometimes found on the same grounds. The hook in use for black-fish, varies in size, with many anglers, some preferring quite a small size for taking the largest size fish, say about No. 10 ; and others, longing from No. 3 to No. 5, the most proper sizes for general fishing. These hooks, it will be noticed, by referring to plate 2. of hooks, are made of much stronger wire, and are known amongst anglers and dealers in tackle, as the black-fish hook. The hook should be attached to a strong piece of flax line about ten to fifteen inches in length ; and if you angle with two hooks, they should be from four to six inches apart; your sinker should vary according to the tide, and be fixed above your hooks about twelve or fifteen inches. Some anglers prefer twisted gut lengths * to their hooks instead of flax; but as the tautog lies chiefly on rocky ground and on sharp stony bottoms, and are not very shy, it is hardly necessary to run the risk of losing gut tackle when plain line will answer. The black fish being a bottom fish altogether, doe9 not admit of such variety of modes of capture as others of the briny element. The most common mode of taking him is * Others uso short lengths of gimp. An old and experienced angler, who is very fond of taking the tautog, says that to fish pleasantly and with expedition, ho always attaches his Imoks to twisted snells com- posed of threo strands of strong gut. In this manner he avoids the delay and perplexity occasioned by the frequent cntungling of the ordinary flax line snells, and can tako more fish thun by any other mothod 184 THE BLACK-FISH. with a common drop line made of flax, and from ten to thirty yards in length, according to the depth of water. When the black fish favors you with a bite, give particu- lar attention and pull quickly, for he has a hard, tough mouth, and if your hook and tackle are strong, you need not be fear- ful of any damage to your tools, and with proper precaution, you can call him in. Give him no quarter, when using the hand-line, (until you quarter him for dinner;) keep your line tight, and draw him straight up until he snuff the pure air of heaven, much to his chagrin, and greatly to yottr satisfaction: and remember, should you be unwatchful, and he take you unawares and go to the bottom, your chance is very small; for although he may roam occasionally, in search of his favorite food, still ho loves his rocky home, and down he will go with your bottom tackle, unless you are on the alert. Remember, then, that “Eternal vigilance is the price of” — a black fish. How to Cook the Black-Fish — Not seemingly by a pro- fessor of the rod and line, yet certainly by one who well understands how to bring out the gastronomic properties of the subject under discussion, the following, from the pages of the Knickerbocker magazine, although containing much that is extraneous, will, wo think, suit the taste of our reader: “And now, fair ruler of the destinies of dinner! (for if thou beest a man, I have no sympathies toward thee,) smoke- compelling Hetty, or Mary, or whatevor else may be the happy appelative in which not only thou but all of us rejoice, thou hast lying extended before thee one of the most deli- cately absorbent substances in nature, imbibing flavor from everything which surrounds it, whether of adverse or of pro- pitious tendency; subject, as Warren Hastings said of the tenuro of the llritish possessions in India, alike ‘to the touch of chance, or tho breath of opinion.’ THE BLACK-FISH. 185 Thou hast it, my choice Mary! The small, deep stew- pan with its thin cullender or strainer, on which the fish is to be lowered to the bottom, that it ntay, when stewed into soft delight, bo gently raised again, without injuring its integ- rity of form — glows with brightness in front of thee! Thy vigorous arm of mottled red, thy round wrist, and small compact fingers grasp the sharp pointed knife with which to satisfy thyself that not one scale remains around the head, tho fins, the tail. “ Now ta >' a n< l fins are nicely shortened in their termina- tion, not hacked oft. A little salt is thrown over the fish, merely to harden, and not sail it, and it lies two hours for this purpose. It is then scored, that it may not break when it swells, and browned well upon the gridiron : from which it is carefully taken up, and laid to repose upon a bed of nicely peeled and very fresh mushrooms, daintly spread over the strainer. “ While the fish was hardening, Mary has had a commu- nication from up stairs. An extra bottle of the Chateau of twenty-five had been imavailingly opened the day before, to tempt a total temporance friend who had arrived from the country. Good part of it remains, and at this moment it is decanted into the stew-pan ; the freighted strainer descends into the wine ; and the fish, entirely immersed in the ame- thystine element, regrets no more its loss of life, of liberty, and youth. A white onion or two is sliced into rings, that fall ns decorations over him ; a few berries of pepper thrown m i six cloves ; two blades of mace ; an eclmlot, if you think proper ; and cayenne or not, according to your taste. The Stew-pan is then covered, and a careful, slow, epicurean sim- mer completes tho work.” CHAPTER XIV. OF THE DRUM. This is a large, uncouth, ugly-looking fish, not often sough after as an object of sport, but sometimes, and when least expected, tbe subject of the angler’s toil. If, however, he should be lightly rigged, aud not on the alert, this ele- phant looking animal often has the pleasure of chewing the bottom tackle at his leisure, and the astonished sportsman unfortunately has to rig himself anew, (after twisting h» segar in his mouth, or rolling his quid on t’other side, it has either,) or chew the cud of discontent at not having sup- plied himself with extra tackle, or not being more strong y accoutred. . , Mitchill has tho following remarks on this fish: “ Black Drum — (Sciiena fusca)— Length when lull grown, thirty-eight or forty inches; depth, fourteen or sixteen. Bpreuds from the back wedgewise towards the belly, wine is rather flatfish anil broad, rendering it easy to turn the dead fish upon tho belly for examination. “The black drum often equals fifteen, twenty, and even thirty pounds. The individual now before me comes to thirty-four. I once weighed a drum that was as heavy as THE DRUM. 187 eighty pounds. I have been credibly informed of one that weighed a hundred and one pounds. He is taken abundantly during the summer, both with line and net. ‘‘Color of the drum, a dull silvery, like the dross of melted lead, with a faint, brassy tinge of ruddy, though between the scales the skin is inclined to blackish on the back and sides, and thereby gives its denomination to the fish. Scales of the body exceedingly large, stiff, horny, and marked by radiated and concentric lines. Their form receding some- what from square, and approaching the figure of the letter D. They are so planted in tho skin, that it i.s difficult to remove them. Lateral line, broad, rather indistinct, and running scaly to the end of the tail. Under the scales the silvery hue is most considerable. A black patch on the other side of the older individuals, behind the pectoral fin. All the fins in- clined to reddish, more especially the caudal, pectoral, and dorsal. Sometimes the space covered or shaded by the pectoral fin is pale or white. Tail even, eyes silvery yellow. “II is name of drum has been given on account of the drumming noise he makes, immediately after being out of water. “lie swims in numerous 6honls in the shallow bays on the south side of Long Island, where fishermen, during tho warm season, can find them, almost like a flock of sheep. Is a dull fish.” In addition to his whereabouts, slated by Mitchill, he is found in large company in the Kills and off Communipaw, where he is often taken by the weak-fish uud basse angler. He sometimes takes a stroll up the stream, solus, and has been taken in Harlem river; and although a dull fish, it would seem, by the following extract from the New-York Herald, sometimes requires skill, experience, and activity, in takiug him: “A great Haul . — A gentleman of this city, who delights 1SS THE DRUM. in the rare sport uf angling, and has spent a good part of the summer at Shantz’s Hotel, Macomb’s Dam, fishing with va- ried success for basso and blue-fish, day before yesterday,* (Thursday,) struck one of the monsters of the deep that sometimes visit that vicinity. On the first pull he thought that he had struck bottom, but his reel soon began to whiz, and his lino to run with great rapidity. Finding nearly all his line, 300 feet, run out, he took up his anchor-stone, and away went the boat down the river about a mile; he then managed so as to make a tack, and up the river they went again, and down and up again for two hours and a half, until finally his majesty was got into shallow water, and a seizure made under the gills, but ho slipped grasp and made a sud- den lurch, taking rod and line, and floored himself on the grass about twenty yards from the boat. The gentleman, who is a muscular man, succeeded with some difficulty in getting him into the boat, when he proved to be a drum of tho largest size, and on weighing at the hotel weighed a little over seventy pounds. This is believed to bo tho largest fish ever taken with rod and reel. The hooks were ordinary busse hooks, with a yard leader on double silk-worm gut, purchased at Brown’s, a few days since, in Fulton street, near our office. A fish of the same kind was taken last summer in the Kills, by Mr. Michaels, weighing over forty pounds, and one by Mr. Keese, a few years ago, weighing over fifty pounds; but this caps the climax, and Mr. R. deserves a great deal of credit for his perseverance in this extraordinary feat.” * August, 1844. CHAPTER XV. OF THE BLACK, OR OSWEGO BASSE. This is the favorite game fihh of the northern and western parts of our country, and is found in abundance in most of the northern lakes and western rivers. To our piscatorial friends in New-York, Ohio, Michigan and Kentucky, they afford unceasing delight, and no fish receives more enco- miums as to the pleasure derived, either from the rod or fork. His usual size is about twelve to fifteen inches in length by two inches in thickness and five inches broad. The color is deep black along the back and sides, growing lighter to- wards the belly, and becoming yellowish, in the female. It has a thick oval head ; large mouth, with rows of small teeth; a wide dorsal fin near the centre of the body ; another to- wards the tail, with corresponding pectoral and anal fins. The body is quite thick near the head, and tapers regularly, terminating in a swallow tail. It feeds principally on small fish, which betray its proximity by rising to the surface to elude pursuit. It is best token with minnows and other kinds of small fish, but bites freely at lobsters and muscles. The Buffalo correspondent appears to think that the black 190 THE BLACK BASSE. basse and Oswego basso are of different species. Hear hi in : “ The Oswego and Black Basse.— The Oswego basse and black basse bear so strong a resemblance to each other that not one fisherman in ten knows them as distinct entities. In form, color, weight, and habits, the two are almost perfectly identical; and yet their differences, though minute, arc strik- ing and essential. An Oswego basse, when placed by a black basse of the same size, is readily distinguished by his more forked tail, his greater thickness of shoulder, his coarser ecale9, and, above all, by his mouth, which, when open, is nearly twice as large as that of the black basse. In Lake Ontario, the Oswego basse is abundant, and the black basse comparatively rare. In Lake Erie, the black basse greatly predominates, and it may be doubted whether the Oswego- nian — like certain citizens of the Ontario shore — is not an interloper in our waters, who has found his way to us from below through some canal. However this may bo, ho is certainly right welcome ! 11 The black basse is our chief object of pursuit — his cap- ture is our dearest triumph — his captive form our proudest trophy. When word first comes, in June, that the black basse bites in our river, what a stir there is among our anglers! — what questioning as to the when, and the where, and by whom, and with what bait, and the number, and size ! — what an anxious inquiry after big minnows ! — what a raking and scraping of pond-holes for soft lobsters ! — what a watching of the skies ! — and, if there be no wind, or a zephyr from the south or west, what bright and hopeful faces ! — but if the storm rage, or an easterly wind, however gentle, fan our sleeping bay, what rueful countenances ! — what half-sup- pressed repinings ! — what a woful, spiritless attempting to be busy about our ordinary avocations ! And why this commo- tion ? Because this is the very prince of our game-fishes. THE BLACK BASSE. 191 His capture is a leas easy task, and involves, or is supposed to involve, more science, and to be a truer proof of merit as an angler, than any other tenant of our crystal waters. But (let me whisper it in thy ear, my friend !) there is much of fancy in all this. He is a noble fish, and struggles vigorously and most pertinaciously for liberty ; but no art nor skill, unat* tainable by thee, or any one, is requisite to hook or draw him from his element. “ This fish beds in our streams and rivers, and probably, too, on the bars and shoals of our bay. Numbers run up the larger streams in May, and bite freely at the worm, in the middle and latter part of that month, in the Touawanda. Ilia appearance is too familiar to need description. His color varies, though it generally approaches black. I thiuk only the smaller basso run up the creeks. Those taken in Tona- wanda seldom overweigh two or two and a half pounds, and have a greenish hue. In the river they attain a weight of four and four and a half, and even five pounds ; and occasion- ally heavier ones have been taken, weighing even eight pounds. The river fish, when fresh from the water, is fre- quently banded, like the perch, with broad bars of a darker hue, which disappear, however, and fade into the general color of the fish ns he becomes dry. He seldom takes the hook, in the Niagara, until June. He is always fine eating, but is fattest and best in autumn.” He is angled lor in the usual way, and with the same ar- rangement of tacklo as the striped basse nr salmon; and with some enthusiastic western sportsmen, is thought to give more amusement than either. But the most active and exciting mode of pursuit is with the trolling rod and boat. Wc are indebted to a friend who has frequented Lake George, for the following interesting communication : “ This is a game fish, affording the angler the very highest enjoyment. These fish are taken iu various ways. When 192 THE BLACK BASSE. collected on their feeding grounds, in August aud the subse- quent fall months, they are sometimes taken in considerable numbors. The usual mode of angling for them at this time, is either with or without a float, and with live bait — a small fish taken for the purpose, along the lake shores or in brooks. They are exceedingly strong and active— qualities which delight the angler. When first hooked, they ran very wild, and almost invariably rise to the surface, aud leap one, two, and even three feet in the air, shaking the head violently, evidently with a view to dislodge the fatal hook. Frequently, while making then- runs, they will suddenly turn aud come with all their power directly towards their enemy, and by thus slacking the line, will succeed in shaking the hook loose: this often happens with unexperienced fishermen, but more rarely with the angler who holds a good reel and winds rapidly. The most beautiful mode of angling fur them known, is trolling either with live bait or an artificial fly of large sizo and gay appearance. The writer has succeeded remarkably well with a fly made on a large-sized Limerick hook, such as are used for striped basse when fisliing with crab bait. The fly is made as follows Body of a peacock feather , wings of bright scarlet kerseymere and white pigeon feathers ; or, the feather stopped from a white goose-quill, and wound round like the hackle, and surmounted with tliiu strips of scarlet forwings. For trolling pleasantly aud com- fortably, the angler should provide a moveable scat, which he can place across the gunwale of his boat, in order that he may sit with his back to 1 the oarsman, aud facing the stern. Hhus ho will have full command of his rod aud line, aud not he sitting in tho cramping attitude which the lowness of the seats would cause. He should reel oft fifty to sixty, or oven one hundred or more feet of line, and on going over shallow reefs of seven or eight feet depth, two hundred feet, us the fish feeding on the reefs usually dart aside as the bout passes. THE BLACK BASSE. 193 and do not return immediately to their harboring spot, which is one reason why those who do not use the reel are not as successful as those who employ it. After a few moments they glide back to their favorite spot, and as the fly comes along, dart at and seize it. A strong tug is felt by the angler, who has only to draw gently, and his prey is fastened. The oarsman rests on his oars, to give the angler full command of his line. The noble fish, after one or two runs to right and left, suddenly rises and makes his splendid leap, and plung- ing, again seeks the bottom, again rises, and then tries hia last experiment of dashing right towards the boat. He strug- gles long and vigorously, but his strength is at last exhausted, and yon trail your unresisting captive to the landing net. I have taken them of various weights, the largest weighing five pounds nine ounces: this was done last summer (184 4) in Lake George. I believe they are sometimes taken much larger in the St, Lawrence river, and upper lakes, but my acquaint- ance with them is limited to the beautiful lake just mentioned. “At SberriH’s capital hotel at Caldwell, every facility for enjoying this delightful sport can be had, though the best fishing grounds are down the lake. “An excellent house is kept by Mr. Garfield, twenty-two miles down the lake, where the best fishing stations for the salmon trout are situated. There is a great deal of fine ground for the basse in the neighborhood. “About ten miles from Caldwell, there is a place called the Narrows, where there are numerous small islands with shelving rocky shores, and fine trolling ground. “Anglers will find good plain accommodation at a house kept by Mr. Lyman, who is very kind and attentive to his guests, and furnishes baits, guides, &c. “In trolling for the black basse in Lake George, you will frequently strike those of one-half to three-fourths pound weight, even with the very large fly which I have described. 194 THE BLACK BASSE. There is so great a difference, both in shape and color, be- tween the fish of this size and those of two or more pounds weight, that a stranger would never take them to be of the same species. These small fish are very similar hi shape to the blue-fish of the salt water, while those of the larger size spread in width as they increase in size, so that a fish of two and a half to three pounds, is of a shape between a black-fish, or tautog, and the famous sheepshead. In color they differ also greatly: the small basse being of alight dull greenish color, while the larger grow darker as they increase in size, the largest being nearly black on the back, and of a very dark brownish green on the sides. Tho younger gentry, above described, are not to be despised on account of their size, for when taken with a light trout rod, they will be found to be a fine vigorous fish, and when in their temerity they seize the large fly, on feeling the hook, they will, true to then- nature, make the leap, in imitation of their sires, thus show- ing themselves to bo game fish. I have known them to leap three times while reeling in the long trolling line, whereas tho larger gentry rarely leap more than once.” CHATTER XVI. OF THE SHEEPS HEAD. This is another fish taken by the black-fish and basse sports- men iu the vicinity of New-York. He afi'ords considerable excitement in capture, and much pleasure as a table fish.* Of late years he has been considered very scarce, and docs not seem willing, as usual, to tickle the palates of the inhabit- ants of Manhattan Island. Sheep’s Head — (spurus ovis. — Mitchill.) — “ With smutty faco, banded sides, pale complexion, prominont eyebrows, and grooved dorsal fin. The form of the mouth, and a cer- tain smuttiness of face, have a distant resemblance to the physiognomy of the Bhcep. Thenco comes the namo by which he is usually distinguished. “ Grows big enough to weigh 14 or 15 pounds. One that weighed four pounds and a half, measured twenty inches in length, eight in depth, and three in thickness. Shecpshead is the most esteemed of New-Yoik fishes, and fetches a higher * It is said that the old adage, that “ two hoods oro hottor than one, if one is a sheep's head," will not apply to this fish. 196 THE 3HEEPSHEAD. price than any, excepting, perhaps, fresh salmon and trout. The price varies from a dollar to one hundred and fifty cents, for a fish of middle size; that is, from four to seven pounds. Nothing, in the opinion of a New-Yorker, can exceed boiled sheepshead, served up at a sumptuous dinner. “ General color of the sheepshead a white or obscure sil- very, with a smutty daubing over the face and chin, and a greenish tinge above the brow, and six or seven dark bands or zones of an inch or more in breadth, regularly slanting from back to belly : the latter a dull white, approaching, in some places and individuals, to cream color. Scales large, horny, distinguished by radiated and concentric lines, and somewhat like a square rounded at the comers. They are deeply inserted into the skin; adhere with remarkable firm- ness ; and when they are separated, there is discoverable, on the edges of the skin that enclosed them, a sort of tarnished argentine or brightish leaden hue. Rays of all the fins coarse. « This noble fish visits the neighborhood of Long Island annually. Emerging from the depths of the ocean, he finds in the recesses and inlets there, a plenty of the crabs, muscles, and clams, on which he loves to feed. He confines himself strictly to the salt water, never having been seen in the fresh rivers. His term of continuance is only during the warmest season; that is, from the beginning of June to the middle of September. He then departs to the unknown depths of the Atlantic, and is seen no more until the ensuing summer. I have, however, known him to stay later ; for one of the most numerous collections of sheepshead I ever saw in New- York market, was on the 4th of October, 1814. I have seen him as late as the 17th. « The sheepshead swims in shoals, and la sometimes sur- rounded in great numbers by tho seine. Several hundred have often been taken at a single haul, with the long sweep- ing nets in U6e near Raynortown, Babylon, and Fire Island. I THE SHEEPSHEAD. 197 They even tell of thousands being brought to land at a draught. “ He also bites at the hook, and is not unfrequently caught in succession. The outfitting of a sheepsheading party, is always an occasion of considerable parade and high expectation, as I have often experienced. Whenever a sheepshead is brought on board the boat, more joy is mani- fested than by the possession of any other kind of fish. The sportsmen view the exercise so much above common fishing, that the capture of the sheepshead is the most desirable com- bination of luck with skill ; and the feats of hooking and pull- ing him in, furnish materials for the most hyperbolical stories. The sheepshead is a veiy stout fish, and the hooks and lines aro strong in proportion. Yet he frequently breaks them, and makes his escape. Sheepshead have been caught with such fish tackle fastened to their jaws. When the line and hook gives way, the accident makes a serious impression on the company. As the possession of the sheepshead is a grand prize, so his escape is felt a distressing loss. I knew an an- cient fisherman, who used to record in a book the time, place, and circumstance, of eveiy sheepshead he had caught.” “This fish is sometimes speared, by torch-light, in the wide and shallow bays of Queens and Suffolk counties, Long Island. “ The places where he is found in the greatest abundance, are about 40 miles from the city. He soon dies after being removed from his element, and in such sultry weather soon spoils after death.” The proper tackle for taking this fish is precisely the same as that used for the largest black-fish, to wit : a stout drop- line, of hemp or cotton, from fifty to one hundred and fifty feet in length, and about one-fourth of an inch in thickness, and heavy sinker, according to tide and depth of water, and u stout black-fish hook of the largest size, each of which 198 THE SHEEFSHEAD. should be thoroughly tried before they are cast into the water. With such an outfit, the accidents spoken of by Mitchill may be avoided. An amateur friend, who has had great success in taking this fish, furnishes the following: “ This noble fish has become quite scarce in our harbor. The writer has taken them repeatedly on a small reef near Governor's Island, opposite the Battery, but this was in days long since gone by. They are taken still occasionally at Caving Point, and opposite the signal poles at the Narrows; also at Pelham Bridge, and in Little Hellgate. Strong tackle is essential for hiking them, as they are a very vigorous and powerful fish. They are usually found on reel's or in the neighborhood of large rocks, whither they re- sort for their favorite food, which is the small rock crab and the soft-shell clam— a very common bait is the latter. The clam is put on tho hook whole, by inserting the point of the hook through the stem, and burying the whole of the curve in the body of the clam. This fish is furnished with a fine set of front teeth, very nearly resembling the teeth of the B heep— whence the name ; the roof of the mouth is literally paved with round teeth, placed closely together, like tho paving stones in the carriage track of our city, enabling them to crack the shell of the clams with perfect ease. Some anglers, after placing the clam on the hook, slightly cruck the shell on one Bide ; but this sometimes causes the flesh of the clam to be exposed to those enemies of the angler for ebcepshead — the bergalls. The sheepshead will take the whole clam when he finds it, and cruck it in his paved mouth, without the previous aid of the fisherman. Where the small fish are not plenty— which is tho case on the feeding grounds in the south bays— I much prefer a bait of the opened soft or hard clam of large size — as large at least us a pullet’s egg and have been far more successful with it than with the THE SHEEPS HEAD. 199 whole clam. The shedder crab is also a very fine, attractive bait for them, on grounds where small fish are not numerous. “ Great care and skill are requisite in playing a sheeps* head. His runs are very vigorous, and his struggles to get rid of the hook very powerful. He will dash head-foremost against a rock, or the bottom of the boat, in the most violent manner, evidently striving to rid liimself of the fatal hook, and has often been known to succeed in breaking the hook and escaping. I once saw a very fiue one, which a compan- ion was playing, dash violently against the large rock, (one of the famous stepping stones in Long Island Sound,) and in his next run, rushing against the bottom of the boat, with a loud thump; and when finally subdued and taken, the shank of the hook was found to be broken, and he was only held by the strong guaging of the line. The experienced fishermen along the Long Island shore of the Sound, often succeed in taking sheepshead, by selecting a rock not usually visited by fishermen, and baiting it by throwing in daily, for a week or two, in the proper season, a half-peck of soft clams, whole, depositing them on the eddy 6ide of the rock, caused by the flood-tide. They are thus taken, sometimes, in very shallow water. These cunning fellows carefully conceal the opera- tion of baiting, and when questioned by their competitors, often give evasive answers. I knew one, a fine old fellow, of Great Neck, who, when asked — ‘ Uncle Jim, where did you catch your sheepshead?’ \ery gravely replied — ‘In tho mouth.’ “ Tho general mode of fishing for them is with the hand line, and as before observed, with strong tackle ; but they are also taken, by amateur fishermen, with the rod, and lighter tackle, affording great amusement by their powerful endeavors to escape. When angling for them with the rod, a largo lauding net should always be at hand. A friend of mine, now deceased, wus playing a sheepshead with his rod, 200 THE SHEEPS HEAD. in Flatlands bay, some years since, and when he had fairly exhausted his strength by long and careful skill, and was reeling him towards the boat, on the surface of the water, lost his noble prize by the rapacity of a villanous shark, who seized the fish, and broke away with part of the Hue. In the evening of the same day, some net fishermen were hauling the seine on a neighboring beach, and captured the piratical monster; and on opening him, the sheepshcad was found in his stomach, partly digested, with my friend’s hook in his jaw.” Tbo Buffalo correspondent remarks, of the fresh and salt water sheepshcad — “ This is a villain in goneral estimation — the pest of the fisher for bnssc— a fish that putteth the cook, who would ren- der him acceptable at table, in a quandary— from which, I am sorry to say, I cannot relieve her, though she be at her wit’s end. « He is generally brown, gray or reddish above, mid of a dead, impure white below. His head is lurge, and his body is flattened latterly, though the fryiug-pan rejecteth him. His ordinary weight is two or three pounds, though he some- times weighs five, and even Bix. His food, his haunts, his habits, are similar to those of the black basso, whom he ever accompanieth— as though he were intended by nature as a foil to set off the merits of that jewel of the Hood. He is despised, yea detested by the choleric angler— who pulls him out, and then dasheth him upon the stones. « The sheepshcad of the sea is a lusty, crafty fish, beprnised alike by the fisherman and the epicure. At the turn of the tide, he takes the whole soft clam on your hook at a mouth- ful, and chews it shell and ail, and pulls like a salmon as yon draw him in; and his radiant, deep, and broad-barred sides, as he flaps about on the sand of that low islet in the Great South bay of Long Island, to which you have just hauled THE SHEKFSHKAI). 201 him — how brilliantly they show, and make you think of the dying dolphin, and of old Arion ! and when he reposes at the head of the table — fit place for him — beautiful, though boiled, how heartfelt is the homage he receives from all around ! Truly, it is libel on him, to call by the same name this Faria of the lakes. 41 And yet our fish is vigorous, and not altogether destitute of beauty, to the eye at least of those who know him not. Is it not chronicled, that at Black-Rock, a strange augler once bartered away two noble basse for two large sheepsheads, which, for the nonce, were called white basse ? * The freckled toad, ugly and venomous, wears yet a precious jewel in his head ’ — and our fish, in his clumsy cranium weurs two small loose bones, serrate, and white and polished, which must have some use to him, some wondrous adapta- tion to his mode of life, which, when unfolded, will prove that he is not unregarded by Him who made the great whales and the fishes of the sea. “His mouth is paved with large, flat, rough bones, or teeth, like those of the sea fishes that root up and devour the hardest testacea? : aud, I have little doubt l#it that the natu- ralist who watches him narrowly, will one of these days de- tect him crushing and consuming the Uni and Anac^ontas — the fresh clams of our muddy flats aud sandy bars. “ He bites at the worm, the minnow, the chub, the lob- ster, and makes good play with the line, though ho gives in more quickly than the basse. An experienced angler can generally distinguish his bite and his resistance — hut the most knowing ones are sometimes taken in, uud think him basse until he is fairly brought to view. “When you have caught him, let any one who will accept him, have him ; and take to thyself no merit for the gift. Hia meat is more like leather than fish or flesh. It is a common •wying, that the more you cook him the tojgher he becomes} 202 THE 3HBKFSHIAD. and I am not aware that he is ever eaten raw. Bat, some people do eat him, and profess to like him : they most have stupendous powers of mastication and digestion. I have been told, that, roasted whole in the ashes, just as he comes from the water, he is savory and tender — sed credat Judmua\ I once did eat him, prepared as follows : He was split through the back, put upon the gridiron, there grilled enough to cook a side of pork : his flesh was removed from the skin, boned, chopped up into dice, (probably with a cleaver,) and stewed with milk, butter, pepper and salt. I must say, that, though it was meat of great tenacity, and might well be likened unto India-rubber, it had much sweetness.” CHAPTER XVII. OP THE COD AND TOM-COD. The cod is another salt-water fish of the world, or, more prop- erly, the more northern coasts of the civilized world, as far as known. They are taken in abundance on the coasts of Eng- land, France and Germany, and are found in immense num- bers on the northern shores of our own continent. They are a fine, edible fish ; and although not much of a game fish, afford considerable sport to many of our eastern anglers in the vici- nity of Boston. Smith remarks on this fish — “ We consider it unnecessary to enter into a minute description. Known as the most valu- able production of the sea to man, the cod abounds on the whole coast of Massachusetts, but finurishes in the greatest vigor and abundance still further north. The cod is gregarious, going in immense armies from place to place, but remaining certain parts of the season at particular localities, which afford its appropriate food in the greatest abundance : sea-worms, small muscles, and marine plants, are common on clear, sandy or rocky bottoms — and there the cod is caught. 204 THE COD. “ The in-shore cod, as on the Great Banks, are caught with a line in two to six and eight fathoms of water, where the tide ebbs and flows with considerable force over rocky soundings. Pleasure boats are often successful in hauling one or two hundred iu a day, weighing from one to fifteen pounds. Those large specimens seen occasionally in tho stalls, are procured further out at sea. “ In the spring, tho cod sterns uncommonly voracious ; for however unsuccessful it may have been in snatching the bait from the hook, and notwithstanding the mouth may have been lacerated, it seizes with avidity the very next it discov- ers. Wounds heal in a few days, so that however badly the skin is torn, the gelative of the blood is poured iu so copiously as to close the breach much sooner than the healing process is completed in warm-blooded animals. “ Two or three years since, the keeper of Rainsford Island caught a cod which had suspended to about a yard of line, a lead weight of several pounds, tho other end being secured to a hook which was deeply imbedded in the bones and in- teguments of the upper jaw. How long tho fish had been dragging about the inconvenient burden, it was difficult to decide.” One of the most important features in this fish, is its astonishing fecundity. Leuwenhock has had the patience to count nine millions of eggs in a single cod ; and although hundreds of millions of these eggs are hourly destroyed by the fishermen, who take them at all seasons, and their more voracious brethren of the ocean, who feed upon them — still, says a French writer, on tho subject of their prolific powers, wo have assurance of an inexhaustible supply of wholesome food, secured to all succeeding generations. The best bait for a pleasure party cod-fishing, is the common mud clam ; by some, however, the menhaden * is * This fish also goes under tho name of marsbankor, or mosbonker: THE COD. 205 thought preferable. Many kinds of fish may be successfully caught by the flesh of their own species ; but this is not the case witli the cod. That the odor of some kinds of bait is particularly agreeable is well established ; but the smell of putrid matter, to this fish, is so offensive, that instead of play* ing about the hook, they generally go beyond its influence. They are made an object of much sport and pleasure by the angling inhabitants of Boston and vicinity. The usual mode of taking them is with a stout cotton or hemp line, from fifty to one hundred and fifty feet in length, and about one- fourth of an inch thick, according to the depth of the water, with the largest size black-fish hook, or a small size fisher- man’s cod hook, and a sinker weighing from eight ounces to a pound. Parties on such excursions seldom return without a boat-load of cod, and a well-satisfied but very tired set of anglers. As an instance of what can be done with this fish, with a light tackle, it was stated in the papers of the day, about a year since, that Daniel Webster caught, at Marshfield, a Cod weigh- ing nine pounds, with a common trout line and trout hook. The cod is most delicious as a table fish, and is cooked in various ways : when fresh, he is usually fried or boiled ; when dried, he is an object of export to all parts of the coun- try : at the east, when in this state, he is prepared and mashed up into cakes with potatoes, and is a fuvorite dish. Of late years, the frequenters of New-York dining saloons have been rather amused by the often reiterated cry of the waiters— 1 Hurry up them fish-balls .* This is no more nor less than the potatoo fish-cakes of the east, prepared for the palates of the Gothamites by Sweeney, and Welsh, and other caterers for the appetites of the New-Yorkers. thoy arc found in vast quantities on the coast of Long Island, and in the hays and inlets of Massachusetts, where they uro used for manuring the land. 206 THE TOM-COD. The Tom~Cod or Frost-Fish . — This is a small species of the cod, that runs up the rivers in the vicinity of the ocean, and is found both in this country and many parts of Europe. Although not much of an angle fish, he affords, with the floun- der, a pan mess for the angler in the vicinity of Boston and New-York, in the pleasant days of April and November, when the basse fishing season is over. Smith says — “ The tom-cod may be recognized by three dorsal fins, two anal, three abdominal, two pectoral. The abdominal are small and slender, being before the pectoral, as it respects the head *, under the tip of the under lip is one short, stump-liko cirrus. The caudal fin is broad, and rounded at the extremity. Teeth fine, both in the throat and jaws ; white, 6mall and plump tongue ; the lateral lino bearing up- wards. Its color varies at different seasons of the year, from a rich orange to a light greenish yellow, shaded by a dark brown on the back, and gradually becoming light or yellow between the vent and the gills. It varies in length, from six to fifteen inches, and weighs from a quarter to nearly two pounds, depending, of course, on the age, sex and season. In the north of Europe — admitting this to be the fish, which at present cannot be doubted — they have been occasionally known to exceed eight pounds. The spawning season ap- pears to bo iu February ; in this climate, about the first of May, they begin to take the hook.” They are usually taken by the basse and tautog angler, with the ordinary tackle, with the exception of the hook, which should be a No. 9 black-fish, or No. 6 Kirby. When pursuing this sport exclusively, a small flax line about fifty feet in length, attached to a stiff rod, or iu boat fishing, a me- dium sized hand black-fish line, with small hooks attached to flax or gut snoll, will answer every purpose. CHAPTER XVIII. OF THE FLOUNDER. This is one of tho most singular and odd-looking productions of the deep, and were it not that they are the common salt water fish of the world, would he viewed with wonder and astonishment. One would suppose, from the flat appearance and formation of their bodies, that nature had been rather scarce of materials when making up this division of the salt water tribe. Besides many places of their abode, too nu- merous to mention, in the old world, they are found in most of salt water stations of the new. They are taken in goodly quantities, and in good condition, in certain seasons, according to Smith and Mitchill, in the vicinity of New-York and Mas- sachusetts, and also to tho south and north of these places. Tho former remarks — “No family of aquatic beings is charac- terized by so many strong circumstances. The eyes are both on one side, but so arranged as to look upward at an angle of about eighty degrees. The side on which the eyes are fixed is always colored, but the opposite one is quite light or whitish. In fact, their anatomy demonstrates the greatest want of symmetry. Writers romark, among other things, 208 THE FLOU N PER. thnt the two sides are unequal, and it is very rare to find the pectoral fins resembling one another. In the branchial mem- brane are five rays ; the body seems compressed, as though pressed between two stones ; the dorsal fin encircles the fish like a ribbon, so that the back is on one side ! The venter, or inside cavity, is quite small, but prolonged into a canal in the sido of the tail. There is no air-bladder i and the ekul is the oddest of all crania, in oonsequence erf the arrangement for accommodating both eyes on one side. .... “Notwithstanding the confused manner m which the skeleton is put together, distorted, and twisted in the queer- est form, there is only about the ordinary number ot bones, entering into the composition of other fishes. “Flounder. — (Platessa Vulgaris.)— Being without the swimming-bladder, they naturally keep near the bottom. Indeed, organized, as they obviously are, for looking upward, rather than downward, for their food, as well as the objects they are to avoid. It is quite rapid in its movements, but prefers to remain on the surface of the mud, into which it nestles for concealment, in case of fright. Mitchill has the following: “ Flounder of Ncw-York. (Pleuronectes dentatus.)- With wide, toothed, oblique mouth, and pale brown uniform back. Grows to the size of twenty-four inches long, and twelve broad, in the south bays of Long Island, and weighs five pounds. I have seen him even larger than that. There is considerable variety ill his color and spots. Color of the back and fins commonly a pale brown, without lines or spots ; and yet varieties occur, where the spotted appearance is very plain.” The size of the usual run of this fish, at New-York an Boston, is from five to fifteen inches in length by three to ten in breadth. Like the eel, they lie in tho soft mud at the bottom of rivers, near to tho docks, lumber piles, bridge spiles, &c., living on muscles, insects, and the spawn of fishes. THE FLODHDER. 209 They are in the best condition in the spring and fall, the heat of the summer not being favorable to their perfection, at which time their flesh is soft and not as palatable. They are a favorite angle fish at all the bridges near Boston, where fishermen can be seen at almost any time in mild weather, hauling them up or waiting for a bite. They are taken in Harlem river, New-York, in the vicinity of the bridges, and at the numerous black-fish and rock grounds. They do not appear to keep any particular kind of company, but give tho more finished basse angler somo trouble when seeking a ten-pound rock at the bottom, by nibbling the bait with his small mouth, and 6ometimos insisting on being hooked. The usual mode of taking him is with n small flax drop- line, and small black-fish tackle : to insure success, quite a small hook must bo used, say about No. 8 hook. The basse angler often provides himself with small hooks, and when his favorite fish is not on the feed, is content to take, if he can get them, a mess of flounders. They are, when fresh caught, good pan fish, and by some, when in season and perfection, considered an epicurean dish. CHAPTER XIX. OP THE BLUE-FISH. This fish is a species of the mackerel, and sometimes passes under that name. He has his peculiar grounds in Long Island Sound, where he schools from the ocean in the months of June, July and August, after which he returns to the sea to spend his vacation. They are taken only by troll- ing with the artificial squid — a mode of amusement calling into action the physical as well as scientific powers of the angler. They are a good table fish, when prepared and cooked immediately after being caught, but grow strong and rancid after being any length of time out of the water. The Art of Trolling, of late years, has become a favorite mode of piscatorial amusement, and the blue-fish affords to the inhabitants of Connecticut, Ncw-York and Long Island, a large amount of satisfaction in its pursuit. It is usually performed in a good sized sail-boat, with a guide who knows the ground, or by casting from the shore, and drawing in al- ternately. The former method is most practiced, and being highly approved of by the fair sex, who often compose the best part of a fishing party, of course stamps it at once with THE BLUE-FISH. 211 perfection. To those ladies who unfortunately have to be placed on the list of invalids, and can endure the de- lightful and bracing summer breeze and gentle south wind, a few days’ sport in the Sound, with a blue-fishing party, will amply repay them for their exertion. The tackle is simple, cheap, and easily arranged : it is composed of a squid made of bone, ivory, tin or pearl, with a stout line, of from 100 to 150 feet in length, attached ; and when the boat is in full sail, the squid is thrown out, the fish hooked, drawn in and shaken off, and thrown out, alternately. We give an extract from a letter written by a gentleman on an excursion on the south side of Long Island : “ Who that has been a frequenter of our bays and inlets, can ever forget the intense excitement attending the sport of blue-fishing ? Those who desire to be successful in this de- lightful sport, should provide themselves with a proper outfit, (which can be procured at a triHing expense at any of the shops where fishing tackle is sold,) as an omission in this may result in disappointment. “ The tackle in most general use, is a squid made of block- tin, lead, mother-of-pearl, or white bone, of a flat, narrow- oval shape, say four inches long, armed on one end with a good sized hook, (No. 0000 Kirby,) laid so that the point of the hook be perpendicular to the Hat side of the squid. I would recommend a short length of stout gimp to be put through a hole iu the other end, to attach it to the line. I have re- peatedly vyitnessed, in excursions on the south side of Long Island, the loss of a squid at a time when a lover of this sport could least afford to lose time in making the necessary repairs to his damaged tackle. The line should be of cotton, large sized, and well laid , of, say from forty to sixty yards long. A thin, light line will not answer, as, in case a large fish is hooked, thbre is more than an even chance that the line part before the fish is secured ; and should the fish be got in, 212 THE DLU E-F I S H . the fisher’s lacerated hands will remind him that there is more comfort in trolling with the regular squidding tackle than with a light hemp line, such as we sometimes see used by the uninitiated. “ Being thus provided with the tackle suitable for this sport, you should got a good stout boat, with an experienced bay-man, who is au fait in its management, and intimately acquainted with the habits and localities of the fish; for upon this, in a great measure, depends your chance of a good day’s sport. With a fine breeze, that will propel your boat some four or five miles an hour, you may embark, and having reached the whereabouts of the fish, cast over your squid, with from fifty to one hundred feet of line, which should be tied securely to the boat. The fish sometimes strike with great force, and neglect in fastening the line fre- quently results iu its loss, with everything appertaining thereto. “ There is a great variety of opinion regarding the length of lino most proper to use in this kind of fishing ; but I have found that when the fish are inclined to take the squid, they are not over particular in the quantity of line out, as I have seen fish taken, not only with a very long line, but have hooked and secured some fine ones, myself, almost under the stern of the boat, with certaiidy not over twenty feet of lino. “When a school of fish is found, the boatman should be par- ticular in crossing and re-crossing tho spot where the school is, as in a very contracted space it frequently happens that the greatest sport is to be found. As an example of this, I was enjoying a day’s sport at Shrewsborry Inlet, some two years since, and the only place where I took any fish, was some three hundred yards below the inlet, in tho river; and instead of sailing up some half mile, and down aguiu, over the same ground, I confined my operations to a space of about two THE BLUE- FISH. 213 hundred yards, and was very successful, returning with a fall fare. When a fish is struck, the line should be hauled in with a steady pull — not jerked. If the line is allowed to slack, the fish is apt to throw itself off. “ To disengage the fish from the hook, take the squid in the right hand, and by giving it a slight shake, with the hook uppermost, the fish will drop off into the boat. “ When the boat is in stays, {tacking,) care should be taken to haul in the line ; an omission in this will cause your squid to sink and foul in the bottom glass. “ Blue-dish are sometimes taken from the shore, by cast- ing the squid as far as possible into the water, and hauling it in with sufficient rapidity to prevent its sinking far below the surface. This mode of fishing is attended with a large outlay of labor, but in reward, some fine fish are taken. The places best known and most resorted to for blue-fishing, are Baby Ion, Islip, and Quogue, L. I. The two former have the great South Bay, with Fire Island Inlet, for its ground ; the latter the East Bay, and Pine Neck Iulet. Babylon and Islip are nigh at hand, and easy of access; Quogue lies some ninety miles east of New York, but has become comparatively near by means of the Long Island railway, which places it within five hours of the city. “ In visiting the latter spot, the disciple of the rod and gun will find a good house, and a kind, hospitable, obliging man in its proprietor. Shrewsberry Inlet is another resort, near which, at Port Washington, a fine house has been opened.” CHATTER XX. OF THE SEA-BASSE, PORGEE, &C. These are both sea fish, and abound in immense quantities in the ocean outside of Sandy Hook, New-York, on what are called the Sea-Basso and rorgee Banks. In the summer months, to the pent-up citizen who is obliged to stay in the city during the sweltering heat of July and August— the stranger who would new the beauties of one of the finest harbors in the world— and to the more scientific angler, who, after a season’s fishing at the gently gliding stream, or the romantic mountain lake, would like to try the more bracing atmosphere of the ocean— this mode of angling will often afford a day of amusement and gratification. During the above-mentioned months, steamboats aro pre- pared and fitted up for this species of fishing, and make their trips sometimes daily, returning, often, with well-satisfied amatour ocean anglers, each with their string of fish.” In order to enliven the scene on these occasions, a band of music * In the summer of 1843, immenso quantities woro taken— the stoam- boat ofteu returning with from six to ten thousand poigoos, and a por- poiuo weighing five or »ix hundred pound8. THE S E A-B AS S K, AC . 215 is taken, and cotillion parties aro made up on the upper deck. A skilful harpooner sometimes makes one of the party, and gives excitement to the scene by striking and taking a por- poise. The boat touches at Coney Island, giving the passen- gers an opportunity of a sea bathe and a clam bake ; and also at Fort Hamilton, allowing an opportunity to view the fortifi- cations of the harbor. In addition to this mode, schooners and sloops are char- tered by private pleasure parties, who speud two or three days on an excursion down the bay and sound, affording op- portunity for ocean and inland fishiug, and often return with an assortment of the finny tribe, consisting of perch, trout, rock, tautog, blue-fish, flounders, cod-fish, sea-basso, and por- gees, enough to stock a Bmall-sized fish market. The proprietors of the steamboats endeavor to accommo- date the passengers with bait and tackle, and sometimes suc- ceed; but to insure success and satisfaction, the seeker of this description of sport should procure his own. The line should be of stout flux or hemp, from ten to twenty fathoms in length, (generally for sale, ready furnished, at the fishing tackle stores,) with two or three hooks attached, about a foot apart : those for porgees should be the round bent black- fish No. 3, described on plate 2. For sea-basse, the hook should be a stout Kirby No. 1. The assortment should al- ways consist of both kinds, and plenty ol them, as they aro sometimes taken off by shark and blue-fish, or are broken against the side of the boat in hauling up. The sinker should be of common lead, and weigh from oue-hulf to one pound (the latter size, if only one is taken, is the best.) Clam bait is the only kind used, and necessary : these can be purchased at the markets, ready openod. To render them tough and hard, add a little salt, which will make them cling to the hook much better. When luck favors these excursions, two, three, and even four fish are taken at a haul. It is necessary 216 THE SEA-BAS9K, &C. to be on the alert, and jerk strongly at each bite, or your bait will be taken off. The fish average from one to four pounds, which, together with your pound sinker, makes a consider- able weight to take in, in from ten to fifteen fathoms water. The finger and hand will often become chafed and blistered, where much luck is experienced; to prevent which, the knowing ones provide themselves with a pair of old gloves. With this additional equipment, you can fully enjoy a hardy and active day’s sport, tempered with the benefits arising from the bracing ocean air, and the contemplation of the works of the Creator on the great deep, so beautifully de- scribed by the poet Dana, in the following beautiful lines : Type of the Infinite ! I look away Over the billows, and I cannot stay My thoughts upon a resting-place, or make A shore beyond my vision, whore they break ; But on my spirit stretches, till it 's pain To think ; then rests, and then puts forth again. Thou holdst me by a spell ; and on thy beach I feci nil soul ; and thoughts unmeasured reach Far back beyond all date. ****** CHAPTER XXI. OF SOME OF THE OTHER INHABITANTS OF THE WATERS. In the foregoing articles on the different fishes, it has been the object, as far as possible, to give necessary information of all angle fishes, and the modes of taking them. In fur- therance of this design, many more pages have been occupied than was originally intended! but such a variety of fishes is offered by the nature and extent of our couutry, that it has Beemed almost impossible, without wading thus far, to do justice to our subject. For the further benefit of the reader, we will venture briefly to refer to some others of the finny tribe. THE EEL. This serpentine looking animal has its friends and foes, and is found in almost all fresh and salt water streams that circumvent the globe. In ancient times, it was highly valued ; and at the present, although looked upon as belonging to the snake tribe, is considered, by the majority of fish eaters, as forming a very savory dish. Those that inhabit the salt water, are sometimes taken of a very largo size. The largest 218 THE CHUB. taken, on iecord, was caught in one of the bays in Long Isl- and, and weighed sixteen and a half pounds. They also, in some instances, grow very large in fresh water streams, and have been taken from seven to ten pounds weight. They are not game, but occasion the angler much trouble wherever he drops his line, by sucking oft* his bait or insisting upon being hooked ; when, with all care, the most experienced sportsman seldom escapes without great derangement of tackle. When sought after, he is taken (we say taken, be- cause no difficulty is ever experienced where he is) with any kind of tackle and any bait. The most common mode, how- ever, with those who make a practice of taking him, is with a common drop-line, and a small black-fish or eel hook, No. 8 or 9. A singular and beautiful description of the eel, if any beauty can bo attached to the tribe, is found in some of our fresh water streams, called the lamprey or seven-eyed eel. OF THE CHUB. This beautiful fish is found, according to Smith, in some of the western sections of Massachusetts. “ It is taken with a hook baited with an angle-worm. In winter it may be caught through tho ice by baiting with cheese and Venice turpentine. 11 The head is large, the back of a dusky green, the sides silvery, the abdomen white, the pectoral fins yellowish, and the ventral and anal fins tinged with red. This fish seems to be very timid, and the angler therefore, in fixing himself in a good position, over some deep hole, where tho chub conceals himself under projecting long roots of trees, is ob- liged to move very cautiously, or ho will frighten it away.” Ho is also taken in tho Passaic river, N. J., Otsego lake, Fishkill creek, and many other parts of New-York and Penn- THE BULL-HEAD, SUCKER, AC. 219 sylvania. Their length is not usually over ten inches, and the common size about six. In England and Germany they are sometimes taken weighing eight pounds. They may be taken with the same degree of caution, and with the same kind of tools as those used for trout. They are attracted also by similar bait : in the spring they will take the worm, and later in the season, the grasshopper, and the natural and artificial fly, of every description. In the fall they are again taken at the bottom, in the deep holes, with the worm, cheese, or bread-paste, salmon roe, &c. They yield considerable sport, and are worth the angler’s toil, often being taken and placed as an edible on the table — they are not bad to take with the knife and fork. OF THE BULL-HEAD AND SUCKER. These are fish usually found in the same ponds and streams with perch and pickerel. They are sought after more as an object of sport, among the boys, than as forming an article of food, although they are sometimes cooked for the table. The sucker is also speared in largo quantities by torch light. OF THE BREAM, ROACH, DACE, BLEAK, AND GUDGEON. * These are all described by Smith as natives of the waters of the Eastern States. They aro quite small in size, are all good and nutritious food. They are taken, with ordinary caution, with trout and perch tackle ; but from their size, do not afford much sport. They grow much larger in Eng- land and Scotand, and find favor as a game fish, in English works and among English anglers. OF THE HERRING. A species of fish called herring, is taken by the angler, in 220 THE HERRINS, WHITE-FISH, &c. some of tile fresh water streams of New-Jersey and Delaware. In the latter state, they are very shy, take the fly, and require long rods and fine tackle, similar to that used for trout. In the vicinity of Baltimore they fish fine and far off, and with rods from 20 to 25 feet long, the sportsman experiencing as much pleasure in the capture, as in the taking basse, trout or ealmon. In this vicinity they are called fall-fish. A fish similar in appearance to the herring, and called by the same name, is taken in the bay of New- York, oft' Fort Lafayette. They jump readily at a white, red, or fancy- colored fly, and afford capital sport. OF THE WHITE-FISH. This denomination of the finny tribe is taken generally in nets, and sometimes by the basse and salmon angler, in many of the lakes in the western part of the state of New-York, and affords good sport. As a table fish, it has the highest enco- miums from all sorts of people : it is spoken of as the church- steeple top of perfection, superior to the salmon or trout, or any other fish that breathes and swims. Those who have en- joyed a dish of white-fish, will allow him to be second to none. OF THE CAT-FISH. This is the common fish of the western waters, and is taken by western sportsmen, by squid and fly trolling, aad affords capital amusement. They take their name from the noise they make, similar to the purring of a cat, very fa- miliar to those who have frequented tho west. They are also angled for with a stout drop-line, mid tackle similar to that described for the sheepshead. They are fine table fish. We might go on ad infinitum in our list of the fishes of America, but we trust that wo liave described those which generally give most delight to tho angler, and must here fasten our line. CHAPTER XXII. CONCLUDING REMARKS. We cannot omit inserting the following elegant and appro- priate defence of our art, from the aspersions cast upon it by a great man, by a mild and enthusiastic amateur, who occa- sionally seeks enjoyment, from the cares and vexations of business, in more pleasant pursuits. “The great and learned Dr. Johnson satirically described ailing thus: ‘A stick and a string, with a worm at one end and a fool at the other.’ Dr. Johnson never sat in a boat, surrounded by a beautiful landscape, playing a basse of three, four, or five pounds ; nor stood on the green bank, contend- ing with a trout of like weight ; nor struck an Oswego basse, one hundred feet astern of his trolling boat, in Lake George, or he would never have penned such a severe though stupid satire. There is no recreation so admirably adapted to re- cruit the body and mind of the toiling citizen, as angling. Breaking away from his confining and exhausting toil in the counting-house, office, or workshop, leaving all care behind. 222 CONCLUDING REMARKS. the angler sallies forth to the river, the bay, or some more distant water; and there, amid the most beautiful scenery of nature, plies his art. The absence from the scene of toil and care, for a short season ; the breathing the fresh and healthful air of the country ; the transit to and from the place of amusement, and the exciting and delightful exercise of the art ; all combine to give this recreation a high place in my estimation — and as a Christian, I certainly say, that in some of my solitary rambles, or boat excursions, with my rod, I have been favored with most devout and grateful emotions of the heart, in contemplating the beauties of creation; and looking up from the works of my Maker around me, to Him who made them all, my meditations on the Divine goodness and grace have been most sweet. In these sentiments I fully accord with the pious old angler, Isaac Walton, who expresses them also in his ancient and noble work on angling.” Finally, and to conclude, although our art has been lightly spoken of by a few learned and well meaning men, who cer- taiuly never could have experienced auy of its pleasures, it has the sanction of the great and learned of all ages and of all countries, where the mild and effulgent rays of the sun ad- mit of the growth to perfection and beauty, of the inhabitants of the chrystal waters ; and although we respect the learning and talent of those who we know never had the least idea of the science necessary to some of the modes adopted; yet when we examine the Book of Books, and find in the Book of Job, and in parts of the New Testament, references directly made to drawing out fish with a hook ;* when we look at it as in- ducing to' the contemplation of the works of the Creator, and leading man from nature up to nature’s God ; when wo see, and hear, and read of the minister of religion, the philosopher, + “ Const thou draw out tlio Leviathan with a hook, or hid toii™uo with a cord which thou lettcat doion ! Cuust thou put a hook iuto his uosoi" CONCLUDING REMARKS. 223 the statesman, and the poet, however officially engaged, de lighting in a few hours’ daily recreation in the art, and speak- ing and writing enthusiastically in its favor, finding “Tongues in trees, books in the running brooks, Sermons in stones; we think the objectors might as well have tried to hold a whale with the thread of a spider’s web as to have caused any human being to abandon a recreation at once so delightful, amusing, and beneficial, by their aspersions ; and where the light and aiiy nothingness of ridicule has caused a doubt in the mind of one of its followers, the silken line of praise has caused thousands to pursue and defend it. Let all, then, who belong to the fraternity, having the great, the learned and the good for their example, follow in the footsteps of their illustrious predecessors ; and that they may enjoy many a day of delightful pleasure and happiness, coupled with holy and contemplative feeling, binding them by the cord of friendship to their fellow men ; and that " Their lines may always fall in lucky places,” is the sincere wish of an ardent admirer of the art. As the peruser of the foregoing pages might possibly be- come too ardent in his admiration of the science of angling, we close by inserting one more effusion of the objectors to angling, which, from the dangers seemingly attending the practice, will no doubt deter him from pursuing the sport TO A FISH OF THE BROOKE. Why flyost thou away with fear? Trust me, thoro’s nought of dungcr near: 1 have no wicked kooke, 224 CONCLUDING REMARKS. All covered with a smarting baito, Alas! to tempt thee to thy futc, And draggo thoc from the brookc. 0 harmless tenant of the flood, 1 do not wish to spill thy blood ; For Nature unto tlico Perchance has given a tender wife, And children dear, to charmc thy life, As she hath done to me. Enjoy thy streams, O harmless fish, And when an Angler, for his dish, Through Gluttouey’s vile sin Attempts — a wretch — to pull thee out , God give thee strength, O gentle Trout, To pull the roscoll in ! Da. Wolcott THE JOHN J. BROWN & CO.’S ANGLER’S DEPOT, and General Emporium for the sale of FHiMUKT© IF A (D I& Ej H§ * HARDWARE. FANCY GOODS, AND SPORTING ARTICLES, 122, FULTON-STREET, NEW-YORK. The subscribers having received the award of the American Institute for superior fishing tackle, and also made arrange* ments with the best English, Irish, and American manufac- turers and dealers, would respectfully inform the Angling community, and dealers in angling and sporting materials, that they will keep on hand the following articles, all of which will be warranted of the best materials and workman- ship. RODS. Suporior Trout, Perch, Pickerel, Basse, and Salmon Rods, made of lance-wood, ash, hickory, bamboo, and other woods; Trolling Rods, General Rods, with extra tips, and Walking, stick Rods, of various descriptions. REELS. Plain, Multiplying, and Contracted, imported; and Amen- John J. Brown <$* Co,, 122, Fullon-street. can Reels, with and without stops, to hold from 20 to 200 yards of line, made of the best brass and German silver, with plain and steel pivots. LINES. Lines of Silk, Hair, Silk and Hair, Gut, Grass, Flax, Hemp, and Cotton, from 10 to 800 feet in length, twisted, plaited or tapered. Blue-Fish Lines, for trolling, and Lines for the Sea- Basse Banks. HOOKS. Limerick, Kirby, Aberdeen, Carlisle, English, Irish and American Hooks, by the thousand, hundred, dozen, or smaller quantities, on gut, hair, grass, flax, hemp, gimp and wire, for all descriptions of fishing. FLIES. Trout, perch, pickerel, basso, salmon and herring Flies, of eveiy size and description, on gut, hair, grass, flax and gimp. SQUIDS, BAITS, &.C. Pearl, ivory, bone and tin Squids, of various sizes and shapes, for Blue-Fish, Basse, Pickerel, Salmon, Black-Busse, and other kinds of Angling; artificial Minnows, Grasshoppers, Beetles, Frogs, Mice, Shrimp, Wasps, &c. &c. LEADERS, SINKERS, 8c C. Hair, gut and grass Leaders, of all sizes ; plain, slide and swivel Sinkers ; single and double Swivels, for light or heavy John J. Brown $■ Co., 122, Fulton-street. FLOATS. Cork, Quill and hollow Floats, of all sizes and shapes. BASKETS, NETS, &,c. Trout and Basse Baskets; Crab, Shrimp, Casting and Landing Nets; Baiting Needles, Disgorgers. Clearing Rings; Pocket, Tackle and Fly Books; Bait Boxes; Eel Spears, Fishing Stools, &c. &c. GUT. The best Salmon and Trout Gut always on hand, by the thousand, hundred, or in smaller quantities. Reels, Rods, Flies, Lines, Hooks, and every article in the line, made to order or repaired at the shortest notice. HARDWARE, CUTLERY, FANCY GOODS, COMBS, &.C. &,c. An assortment of Hardware and Cutlery, Sporting Goods, Combs, Brushes, Caues, &c., constantly on hand. In addition to the above mentioned articles, will be found tho following new and useful inventions : THE CANE CHAIR. This is a most useful article to the Angler, Invalid, or or- dinary citizen. In size it is but little larger than the ordinary cane, but can be immediately opened into a neat, durable and convenient Chair, capable of sustaining from 200 to 300 pounds weight. For Angling, or country excursions, crowded assemblies, and to the Tourist, Traveller, and Invalid, this will be found an invaluable accompanimont. John J. Brown if Co., 122, Fulton-street. THE SCREW BUTTON, For straps and suspenders. A most useful and ingenious invention, entirely superseding tho use of the needle and thread. This article should be in the hands or pockets of every individual of the community, and particularly of the travelling, piscatorial and fowling, who will often need them in their excursions. THE PENCIL LETTER BALANCE, Or weighing, writing, guaging and measuring apparatus — containing a Pen, an ever-pointed Pencil, Toothpick, and Guage, a Weighing Machine for the five, ten and twenty cents rates of postage, a Letter Seal and Reserve for leads, and a four-inch measure. This unique and useful article is made in different styles, of German silver, pure silver, and gold, and is warranted correct. THE ESCRITOIR, OR TRAVEL- LER’S POCKET COMPANION, Uniting tho entire requisites of a Portable Writing desk, and containing a Letter Balance, a Pen, an Inkstand with India- rubber stopper, warranted secure, a dozen Steel-Pens, a Let- ter Seal, Memorandum Tablet, and Blotting-card, a twelve- inch Measure, India-rubber, fifty Wafers, three sticks of Seal- ing Wax, two Wax Tapers, fifty Promethean Lights for seal- ing letters, with material for ignition, a Recess for letter stamps, and an ingeniously constructed Almanac. The Es- critoir may incidentally take the place of the cumbrous desk, and working upon metallic joints, it may be used at pleasure as a distinct ink or tuper stand, and instantaneous light — thus forming the most perfect collection of writing materials, in- John J. Brown, <5- Co., 122, Fulton-street. formation and articles of utility ever accomplished in so small a compass. It is suitable to the reticule of the lady, and the pocket of the gentleman ; to the tourist and the man of busi- ness; for the parlor, the drawing-room, the chamber; and may strictly be called the personal associate, or wonder of the age. In calling the attention of the public to the foregoing ad- vertisement, we would state, that no means or expense will bo spared to keep up a regular assortment of all the articles in the Angling, Sporting, and Hardware line, for which our place has so long been noted. The latest and most ingenious and useful inventions, in all branches of the trade, will be kept constantly on hand, and sold at the lowest cash prices. Persons writing from the country, may rely upon being faith- fully supplied at the shortest notice, and the most reasonable terms. Anglers will bear in mind that the present postage law admits of the transportation of many light articles of tackle at very small expense. Flies, Hooks on Gut, and light Lines, can be sent in considerable quantities at the five and ten cent rates. JOHN J. BROWN & CO. New-York, 1845.